Service DP710

SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Apr 06
3KK70760
DP-710/JS-710
PF-710/750
DF-730
Fax System (N)
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH
THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER DEXPLOSION SIL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.
REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MME TYPE OU DUN TYPE REC-
OMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RBUT LES BATTERIES USAGES CON-
FORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1.Installation Precautions
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. .............................................................................................
Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. ............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .......
Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................
Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. .........................................................................................................................
Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ...........
Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ...............................................
Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ...........................................................
Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is acciden-
tally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi-
ately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical
attention. ......................................................................................................................................
Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copiers
instruction handbook. .....................................................................................................................
2.Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ...............
Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .......................................................................................................................................
Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. .....................................................................................................................
Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................
Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro-
chure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious
accident. ..........................................................................................................................................
When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ................................................................
Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. .............
Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ..............................................................
Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...........................................................................................................................
Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ............................................................................................................
CAUTION
Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................
Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ........
Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ........................................................................................................
Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ....................
Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. .....................................................................................................
Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. .............................................................................................
Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ........
Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ....................................
After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. ...................................................................................................
Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................
Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: .....................................
Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
Always wash hands afterwards.
Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. .......................................................................................................................
Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme-
diately. ............................................................................................................................................
3.Miscellaneous
WARNING
Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. .....................................................................................
DP-710
3J9
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-2
1-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Unpacking .........................................................................................................................................1-2-2
(2) Removing tapes and spacer..............................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item..........................................................................................................1-3-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list...............................................................................................................1-3-2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Original misfeed indication ................................................................................................................1-4-1
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions................................................................................................1-4-1
(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-3
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-5
(1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-5
(2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-5
1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-6
1-4-4 Mechanical problems..............................................................................................................................1-4-7
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1
1-5-2 Original feed section ...............................................................................................................................1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley...............................................1-5-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ..............................................................................1-5-3
2-1 Mechanical construction
2-1-1 Original feed section ...............................................................................................................................2-1-1
2-1-2 Original switchback section.....................................................................................................................2-1-2
(1) Operation of original switchback .......................................................................................................2-1-3
2-1-3 Original conveying section......................................................................................................................2-1-4
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2
(3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-3
(4) Clutches and solenoids .....................................................................................................................2-2-4
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 DP driver PWB........................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No.1....................................................................................................................................2-4-1
Timing chart No.2....................................................................................................................................2-4-2
Timing chart No.3....................................................................................................................................2-4-3
Timing chart No.4....................................................................................................................................2-4-4
List of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-5
Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-6
Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-8
3J9
1-1-1
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications
Type................................................ Machine mounted type duplex sheet-through document feeder
Original feed system....................... Automatic feed
Originals.......................................... Sheets
Original weights .............................. Single-sided original mode: 45 - 160 g/m
2
Double-sided original mode: 50 - 120 g/m
2
Original paper ................................. Plain paper, thermal paper, art paper and colored paper
Original sizes .................................. A3 - A5R, folio/11" x 17" - 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
No. of originals................................ Up to 70 sheets (B4/8 1/2" x 14" or larger)
Up to 100 sheets (A4/11" x 8 1/2" or smaller)
Up to 30 sheets in the auto selection mode
Original processing speed .............. Original replacement: Max. 32 sheets/min (A4/11" x 8 1/2")
Original scanning: 150 mm/s (100%)
Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine (5 V DC and 24 V DC)
Dimensions..................................... 571 (W) x 488 (D) x 134 (H) mm
22 1/2" (W) x 19 3/16" (D) x 5 1/4" (H)
Figure 1-1-1
Weight............................................. Approx. 11.5 kg/Approx. 25.3 lbs
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
a b
c
a: 571 mm/22 1/2
b: 488 mm/19 3/16
c: 134 mm/5 1/4
3J9
1-1-2
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-2
1 3 6 2
5
4
1. Original table
2. Original width guides
3. Original eject table
4. Document processor cover
5. Original loaded indicator
6. Cleaning cloth compartment
3J9
1-1-3
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section
Paper and original path
1. Original feed section
2. Original switchback section
3. Original conveying section
3J9
1-1-4
3J9
1-2-1
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment
1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed
onto the machine.
Avoid dust and vibration.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-
cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a room with good ventilation.
3J9
1-2-2
1-2-2 Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1. Document processor
2. Outer case
3. Stay
4. Bottom pad
5. Spacer
6. Original mat
7. Front pad
8. Rear upper pad
9. Rear lower pad
10. Plastic sheet
11. Spacer
12. Plastic bag
13. Installation guide
14. Bar code labels
3J9
1-2-3
(2) Removing tapes and spacer
Procedure
1. Remove two tapes and then remove the air
cap.
2. Remove two tapes and spacer.
Figure 1-2-2
Air cap
Tepe
Tepe
Tepe
Tepe
Spacer
3J9
1-2-4
3J9
1-3-1
1-3-1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter 10871087 using
the numeric keys.
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item
number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is
selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
Run another maintenance
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
3J9
1-3-2
(2) Maintenance mode item list
Section
Item
No.
Content of maintenance item
Initial
setting*
Optical U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0/0
*1
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0
*1
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0
*1
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0
*1
U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment -
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation 200/200/200
*1
Operation
panel and
support
equipment
U203 Operating the DP separately -
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors -
U244 Checking the DP switches -
Mode setting U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DP NORMAL
*1,*2
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON
*1
Image
processing
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0
*1
Other U905 Checking counts by optional devices -
*Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021
3J9
1-3-3
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U068
Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the document processor. Performs the test copy at the four
scanning positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the document proces-
sor is used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select ADJUST DATA of the screen for selecting an item.
3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left
when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Select TEST POSITION of the screen for selecting an item.
6. Select the Scanning position using the cursor up/down keys.
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the document processor and press the interrupt key.
The screen for the test copy mode is displayed.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no
black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Display Description Setting
range
Default
setting
Change in
value per step
ADJUST DATA Starting position adjustment for
scanning originals
-40 to 32 0 0.09 mm
TEST POSITION Scanning position for the test copy
originals
0 to 3 0 -
3J9
1-3-4
U070
Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP
is used.
Adjustment
2. Press the interrupt key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value.
For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Figure 1-3-1
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description Setting
range
Initial
setting
Change in
value per step
Original conveying motor speed -25 to 25 0 0.1 %
Original Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
U070
U071
(P.1-3-5)
U404
(P.1-3-13)
3J9
1-3-5
U071
Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the optional DP is used.
Adjustment
2. Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value of exp.1.
For copy example 2, decrease the value of exp.1.
Figure 1-3-2
Caution
maintenance mode.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description Setting
range
Initial
setting
Change in
value per step
ADJUST DATA1 DP leading edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.19 mm
ADJUST DATA2 DP trailing edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.19 mm
Original Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
U071
U404
(P.1-3-13)
3J9
1-3-6
U072
Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when
the optional DP is used.
Adjustment
2. Select the item.
For copy example 1, increase the value.
For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Figure 1-3-3
Caution
maintenance mode.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
Setting
range
Initial
setting
Change in
value per step
DATA(simplex) DP center line (simplex mode) -78 to 78 0 0.17 mm
DATA(duplex 1) DP center line (duplex mode) -78 to 78 0 0.17 mm
DATA(duplex 2) DP center line (duplex mode) -78 to 78 0 0.17 mm
Original Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Reference
U072
U404
(P.1-3-13)
3J9
1-3-7
U076
Executing DP automatic adjustment
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section.
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U070, U071 and U072 will also be updated.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section.
Remarks
Cut a trail edge of a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) as shown in a figure.
Figure 1-3-4
Method
2. Set a specified original (part number: 2A068021) in the DP.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is dis-
played.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
128 1mm
+
-
+
-
60 1mm
Cut with the edge of black belt.
Display Description
CONVEY SPEED DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
LEAD EDGE ADJ DP leading edge registration
TRAIL EDGE ADJ DP trailing edge registration
DP CENTER DP original center line
3J9
1-3-8
U076 If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed
and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the
procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding
maintenance items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is
displayed.
If stop/ during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
Sets the black line inspection at the time of reading the original from the DP.
Purpose
When using optional DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original
reading position.
Method
2. Select the item to be set. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting: standard data when dust is detected
1. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting: Initialization of original reading position
1. Select CLEAR.
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Code Description
61 Sub scan maginification is above the 2.5%
62 Leading timing is above 3.2mm
63 Trailing timing is above 3.2mm
64 The gap of sub scan direction is above 1.5mm
65 The gap of the center line is above 3.2mm
67 The gap of main scanning direction is above 1.5mm
68 The leading black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.
69 The trailing black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.
6a The right edge black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.
6b The left edge black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.
6f Timeout occurred when reading out from memory.
Display Description
CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected.
BLACK Initialization of original reading position.
Display Description Setting range
Default
setting
CCD R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust. 0 to 255 200
CCD G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust. 0 to 255 200
CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust. 0 to 255 200
3J9
1-3-9
U203
Operating the DP separately
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.
Method
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts.
4. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
ADP With paper, single-sided original
RADP With paper, double-sided original
ADP (NON P) Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)
RADP (NON P) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)
3J9
1-3-10
U243
Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the document processor on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the document processor motors, solenoids and clutch.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts.
3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U244
Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the document processor.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the document processor operate correctly.
Start
2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Method for the on/off switches (SW)
1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Motors, solenoids and clutch Operation
F MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operation
C MOT Original paper conveying motor (OCM) In operation
FD CL Original feed clutch (OFCL) On for 0.5 s
EJ SL Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) On for 0.5 s
RJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 s
FD SL Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) On and off
RP SL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On and off
Display Description
SW On/off switches
VR Volume switch
Display Description
SET SW Original set switch (OSSW)
FEED SW Original feed switch (OFSW)
REV SW Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
TMG SW DP timing switch (DPTSW)
SZ A SW Original size length switch (OSLSW)
3J9
1-3-11
U244
Method for the volume switch (VR)
1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch.
The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted.
For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are
adjusted for A4R paper, it indicates that the original width is detected correctly.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Numerical
value
A5R
B5R
Folio/A4R
B4/B5
CF (11" x 15")
A3/A4
Original width to be detected
5
1
/2" x 8
1
/2"
8
1
/2" x 14"/
8
1
/2" x 11"
11" x 17"/
11" x 15"/
11" x 8
1
/2"
000
49.664
50.176
61.440
61.952
103.936
104.448
139.264
139.776
146.432
146.994
197.120
197.632
197.720
223.232
256
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3J9
1-3-12
U263
Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DP
Description
Sets whether the copies will be ejected in the same or opposite order as the originals when copying from the
document processor.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Setting
2. Select the ejection order.
Initial setting: FACE-DOWN
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish
on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Setting
2. Select ON or OFF.
Initial setting: ON
Setting count value is displayed only if the setting is ON.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
FACE-DOWN (NOMAL) Face down ejection
FACE-UP (SPEED) Face up ejection with bitmap copy
FACE-UP (MEMORY) Face up ejection with memory copy
Display Description
ON Displays the cleaning guidance
OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance
3J9
1-3-13
U404
Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the DP is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode
Adjustment
2. Select the item.
5. Change the setting value using the zoom +/- keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
Figure 1-3-5
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U403
(See the service manual
for the machine.)
U402
(See the service manual
for the machine.))
U404
Display Description
Setting
range
Initial
setting
Change in
value per step
A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
B MARGIN Leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
C MARGIN Right margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
D MARGIN Trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
Leading edge margin
(3.50.5mm)
Ejection direction
(reference)
Trailing edge margin
(2.01.0mm)
Left margin
(2.01.0mm)
Right margin
(2.01.0mm)
3J9
1-3-14
U905
Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays or clears the counts of optional DP or finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of optional DP and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
DP
FINISHER (3000-sheet document finisher or document finisher)
When installing the document finisher, value of CP CNT and STAPLE are displayed.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
ADP Number of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP Number of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
Display Description
CP CNT Number of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated
PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated
STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated
SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated
3J9
1-4-1
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection
(1) Original misfeed indication
When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and a message is shown on the machine operation
panel. The DP original set indicator also flashes red.
To remove the jammed original, open the document processor cover or the DP original reversing cover.
To reset the original misfeed detection, open and close the document processor cover or DP original reversing cover to
turn DP safety switch 1 or 2 off and on.
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
OFSW
OSBSW
DPTSW
3J9
1-4-2
Section Jam code Conditions Specified
time
DP 70
No original feed
In the single-sided or double-sided original mode, primary
original feed does not start.
71
An original jam in the orig-
inal feed/conveying sec-
tion
During the secondary original feed in the single-sided original
mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn on within
specified time.
1740ms
72
tion 2
mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) or original switchback
switch (OSBSW) does not turn off within specified time.
5956ms
During original switchback operation in the double-sided origi-
nal mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) or original switch-
back switch (OSBSW) does not turn off within specified time.
4318ms
73
inal conveying section
During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or dou-
ble-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW) does
not turn off within specified time.
3784ms
74
inal registration section
The original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn on
within specified time.
2045ms
75
inal registration section
In the single-sided original mode, the DP timing switch
(DPTSW) does not turn on within specified time.
1740ms
In the double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch
(DPTSW) does not turn on within specified time.
907ms
In the single-sided original mode, the original feed switch
(OFSW) does not turn off within specified time.
5956ms
In the double-sided original mode, the original switchback
switch (OSBSW) does not turn off within specified time.
4318ms
76
tion
mode, the original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn
on within specified time.
2774ms
78
DP cover open
DP cover is open. -
Optional fin-
isher
92
Exit sensor non-arrival
jam (document finisher
only)
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned on
even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sen-
sor (PES) was turned on.
1770ms
93
Reverse sensor jam (doc-
ument finisher only)
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn on within specified
time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
1071ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned on within specified
time.
435ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn off within specified
time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning off.
622ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned off within specified
time its turning on.
Depends on
paper size
94
Paper entry sensor stay/
remaining jam (document
finisher only)
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within specified
Depends on
paper size
3J9
1-4-3
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)
An original jams in
DP is indicated dur-
ing copying (no origi-
nal feed).
Jam code 70
Defective original feed
switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on
and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
motor.
Run maintenance item U243 and select original feed motor on the
touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
if necessary.
(2)
An original jams in
ing copying (a jam in
the original feed/con-
veying section 1).
Jam code 71
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
DP timing switch, original feed switch, original switchback switch
Defective pulleys or rollers. Check visually and replace.
DP feed pulley, DP separation pulley
DP registration roller, DP registration pulley
Lower conveying roller, reading pulley
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
if necessary.
Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(3)
An original jams in
the original feed/con-
veying section 2).
Jam code 72
if necessary.
(4)
An original jams in
the original convey-
ing section).
Jam code 73
if necessary.
(5)
An original jams in
ing copying (jam in
the original registra-
tion section).
Jam code 74
Defective original switch-
back switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback
switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch
if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not
displayed in reverse.
3J9
1-4-4
(6)
An original jams in
ing copying (jam in
the original registra-
tion section).
Jam code 75
if necessary.
(7)
An original jams in
ing copying (jam in
the original feed/reg-
istration section).
Jam code 76
Original feed switch, original switchback switch
if necessary.
3J9
1-4-5
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-
played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed
requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning front cover/feed cover switch off and back
on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code Contents
Remarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0410 DP communication problem
There is no reply after 5 retries at com-
munication or a communication error
occurs.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
Check the connection of connector YC17 on
the scanner PWB and the connector YC1 on
the DP drive PWB. Repair or replace if nec-
essary.
Defective PWB. Replace the DP drive PWB or scanner PWB
and check for correct operation.
C9060 EEPROM problem
Read and write data does not match.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
the scanner PWB and the continuity across
the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective DP drive
PWB.
Replace DP drive PWB and check for cor-
rect operation.
3J9
1-4-6
1-4-3 Electric problems
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)
The original feed
motor or original con-
veying motor does
not operate.
Defective motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
feed motor or original conveying motor.
Poor contact in the connec-
tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and check if the motor operates
when the following terminals on the DP driver PWB go low. If not,
replace the corresponding motor.
Original feed motor: YC2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6
Original conveying motor: YC2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12
Defective DP driver PWB. Run maintenance item U243 and check if following terminals on
the DP driver PWB go low. If not, replace the DP driver PWB.
Original feed motor: YC2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6
Original conveying motor: YC2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12
(2)
The original feed
solenoid, switchback
feedshift solenoid,
eject feedshift sole-
noid or switchback
pressure solenoid
does not operate.
Defective solenoid coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the corre-
sponding solenoid.
tor terminals.
Defective DP driver PWB. Run maintenance item U243 and check if following terminals on
the DP driver PWB goes low. If not, replace the DP driver PWB.
Original feed solenoid: YC2-14 and 2-15
Switchback feedshift solenoid: YC3-2
Eject feedshift solenoid: YC3-4
Switchback pressure solenoid: YC2-17 and 2-18
(3)
The original feed
clutch does not oper-
ate.
Defective clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the corre-
sponding solenoid.
tor terminals.
Defective DP driver PWB. Run maintenance item U243 and check if YC4-2 on the DP driver
PWB goes low. If not, replace the DP driver PWB.
(4)
A message indicating
cover open is dis-
played when the DP
is closed correctly.
tor terminals.
Defective DP safety switch
1.
Check for continuity across the contacts of the switch. If none
when the switch is on, replace DP safety switch 1.
(5)
An original jams
when the main power
switch is turned on.
A piece of paper torn from
an original is caught around
the switch.
Remove any found.
switch, original switchback
switch or DP timing switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the switch on and off manu-
ally. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch
on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
The surface facing the DP
timing switch is soiled.
Check if the projection at the center of the conveying cover that is
facing the DP timing switch is soiled with paper powder. If so,
clean it.
3J9
1-4-7
1-4-4 Mechanical problems
(1)
No primary original feed.
The surfaces of the DP forwarding pulleys,
DP original feed pulley or DP separation pul-
ley are dirty with paper powder.
Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol
if they are dirty.
Check if the DP original feed pulley or the DP
forwarding pulley is deformed.
If so, replace (see page 1-5-3).
Electrical problem with the following clutch or
solenoid:
Original feed solenoid
Original feed clutch
See page 1-5-7.
(2)
No secondary original
feed.
The DP registration pulley and the DP regis-
tration roller do not contact each other cor-
rectly.
if they are dirty.
(3)
Originals jam.
Originals outside the specifications are used. Use only originals conforming to the specifi-
cations.
The surfaces of the DP forwarding pulleys,
DP original feed pulley or DP separation pul-
ley are dirty with paper powder.
if they are dirty.
The DP original feed pulley and the DP sepa-
ration pulley do not contact each other cor-
rectly.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
3J9
1-4-8
3J9
1-5-1
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off
before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power
switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static
charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
3J9
1-5-2
1-5-2 Original feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DP forwarding pulley or DP feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the document processor cover.
2. Remove two screws holding the upper origi-
nal feed cover and then the cover.
Detaching the DP forwarding pulley
3. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.
4. Pull out the forwarding shaft toward the rear
side of the machine and slide the bushing.
5. Remove the DP forwarding pulley from the
forwarding shaft.
Detaching the DP feed pulley
6. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.
7. Remove the stop ring at the machine rear.
8. Pull out the front original feed shaft toward
the rear side of the machine and slide the
bushing.
9. Remove the DP feed pulley from the front
original feed shaft.
10. Clean or replace the DP forwarding pulley
and the DP feed pulley.
11. Refit all the removed parts.
When refitting the DP forwarding pulley and
DP feed pulley, ensure that the notches in
the pulleys are aligned with the projections
on the one-way clutches.
Figure 1-5-1
Front original
feed shaft
Bushing
Bushing
DP feed pulley
Forwarding
shaft
DP forwarding belt
DP forwarding pulley
Bushing
Bushing
Stop ring
Stop ring
One-way clutch
One-way clutch
Stop ring
Front
Rear
3J9
1-5-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DP separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the document processor cover
2. Remove two screws holding the upper origi-
nal feed cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-5-2
3. Remove two screws holding the upper feed
guide.
4. Remove the two screws holding the original
feed lift and then the lift.
Figure 1-5-3
Screws
Upper original
feed cover
Screws
Upper original feed
guide plate
Original feed lift
3J9
1-5-4
5. Remove the screw holding the separation
pulley unit and then the unit.
Figure 1-5-4
6. Remove the screw holding the separation
guide and then the guide.
7. Remove the separation shaft from the sepa-
ration pulley arms.
8. Remove the stopper from the separation
shaft and then remove the DP separation
pulley.
9. Clean or replace the DP separation pulley.
10. Refit all the removed parts.
Figure 1-5-5
Screw
Separation pulley unit
Separation shaft
Separation pulley arm
Separation pulley arm
Separation guide
Screw
DP separation pulley
Stopper
3J9
2-1-1
2-1-1 Original feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure 2-1-1. An original placed on the original table is conveyed to
the original switchback section or the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-1 Original feed section
Figure 2-1-2 Original feed section block diagram
(1) Original table
(2) DP forwarding pulleys
(3) DP original feed pulley
(4) DP separation pulley
(5) DP original feed upper guide
(6) DP original feed lower guide
(7) Original feed lift
(8) DP registration pulley
(9) DP registration roller
(10) DP registration guide
(11) Original set switch (OSSW)
(12) Original feed switch (OFSW)
(13) Original feed clutch (OFCL)
(14) Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)
OFSW
OFSOL
OFCL
OFM
DPDPWB
Y
C
3
-
6
Y
C
2
-
1
4

-

Y
C
2
-
1
5
Y
C
4
-
2
Y
C
3
-
9
Y
C
2
-
3

-

Y
C
2
-
6
OSSW
3J9
2-1-2
2-1-2 Original switchback section
The original switchback section consists of the parts shown in figure 2-1-3. The original from the original feed section or
original conveying section is reversed and conveyed to the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-3 Original switchback section
Figure 2-1-4 Original switchback section block diagram
(1) Switchback pulley
(2) Switchback roller
(3) Switchback feedshift guide
(4) Left switchback guide
(5) Switchback guide
(6) Original switchback switch
(OSBSW)
(7) Switchback feedshift solenoid
(SBFSSOL)
(8) Switchback pressure solenoid
(SBPSOL)
DPDPWB
Y
C
4
-
4
Y
C
3
-
2
Y
C
2
-
1
7

-
Y
C
2
-
1
8
OSBSW
SBPSOL SBFSSOL
3J9
2-1-3
(1) Operation of original switchback
In the double-sided original mode, the switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns on, changing the position of the
switchback feedshift guide. This switches the path of the original to the original switchback section to where the original is
fed.
The switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) then turns off, allowing the switchback feedshift guide to return to the origi-
nal position by which the path of the original is switched back to the original conveying section. The now reversed original
is carried to the original conveying section and the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, releasing the switch-
back pulley to prevent an original jam in the original switchback section.
Figure 2-1-5
Switchback
pulley
Switchback feedshift solenoid
3J9
2-1-4
2-1-3 Original conveying section
The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in Figure. Synchronized with the copier scanning operation, the
original is conveyed across the slit glass and ejected when scanning is complete.
In the double-sided original mode, the eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) turns on, moving the eject feedshift guide to
switch the path of the original. When the scanning of the first face (reverse face) of the original is complete, the original is
conveyed to the original switchback section again.
Figure 2-1-6 Original conveying section
Figure 2-1-7 Original conveying section block diagram
(1) Upper original conveying pulley
(2) Upper original conveying roller
(3) Lower original conveying roller
(4) Front scanning pulley
(5) Middle original conveying roller
(6) Middle original conveying pulley
(7) Eject pulley
(8) Eject roller
(9) Original conveying guide
(10) Eject feedshift guide
(11) Upper eject guide
(12) Lower eject guide
(13) Slit glass (copier)
(14) DP timing switch (DPTSW)
(15) Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL)
DPTSW
DPDPWB
Y
C
4
-
7
Y
C
3
-
4
Y
C
2
-
9

-

Y
C
2
-
1
2
EFSSOL
OCM
3J9
2-2-1
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PWBs
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. DP driver PWB (DPDPWB).......................... Controls electrical components of the DP.
2. Original set LED PWB (OSLEDPWB).......... Indicates presence of originals on the DP or an original jam.
1
2
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
3J9
2-2-2
(2) Switches and sensors
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. DP safety switch 1 (DPSSW1)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DP is opened; resets original misfeed
detection.
2. DP safety switch 2 (DPSSW2)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DP original switchback cover is
opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. Original set switch (OSSW) ......................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. Original feed switch (OFSW) ....................... Detects primary original feed end timing.
5. Original switchback switch (OSBSW) .......... Detects an original misfeed in the original switchback section.
6. DP timing switch (DPTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
7. Original size length switch (OSLSW) ........... Detects the length of the original.
8. Original size width switch (OSWSW) ........... Detects the width of the original.
8
7
3
2
4
1
5
6
3J9
2-2-3
(3) Motors
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the original feed and switchback sections.
2. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying section.
2
1
3J9
2-2-4
(4) Clutches and solenoids
Figure 2-2-4 Clutches and solenoids
1. Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)................... Operates the paper feed lift.
2. Switchback feedshift solenoid SBFSSOL) ... Operates the switchback feedshift guide.
3. Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) .............. Operates the eject feedshift guide.
4. Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL).... Operates the switchback pulley.
5. Original feed clutch (OFCL) ......................... Controls the drive of the DP original feed pulley.
1
4
2 5
3
3J9
2-3-1
2-3-1 DP driver PWB
Figure 2-3-1DP driver PWB block diagram
DPDPWB
5V Machine
SPWB
CPU
Driver
SBFSSOL
Driver
OFSOL
Driver
SBPSOL
Driver
OFCL
Driver
EFSSOL
O
R
G
V
S
Y
5
V
5
V
R
2
4
V
S
I
S
C
L
K
S
O
D
P
R
D
D
P
S
E
S
E
T

S
W
F
E
E
D
OSSW

OSLEDPWB
OSLSW
OSWSW
DPTSW
OSBSW
OFSW
CPU (U1)
Motor
driver
(U5)
Motor
driver
(U6)

OFM
OCM
3J9
2-3-2
Figure 2-3-2 DP driver PWB silk-screen diagram
Y
C
6
Y
C
5
U
1
Y C 1
Y
C
4
Y
C
3
1
3
1 3 1 4
1 5
2
1
Y
C
2
12
1
7
1
8
21
21
1
6
1
7
3J9
2-3-3
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
Connected
to the
machine.
2 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
3 PG - - Power ground
4 PG - - Power ground
5 R5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
6 SG - - Signal ground
8 SETOUT - - Not used
9 SDI I 5 V DC Serial communication SI signal
10 SDO O 5 V DC Serial communication SD signal
11 SCLK I 5 V DC Serial communication SCLK signal
12 SEL I 5 V DC Serial communication select signal
13 RDY O 5 V DC Serial communication ready signal
14 DPVSYNC O 5 V DC DPTSW: On/Off
15 N.C. - - Not used
16 DPFEED O 5 V DC Timing signal for the machine
YC2 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
Connected
to the origi-
nal feed
motor, origi-
nal convey-
ing motor,
original feed
solenoid
and switch-
back pres-
sure
solenoid.
2 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
3 FMOT A O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse
4 FMOT B O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse
5 FMOT-A O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse
6 FMOT-B O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse
9 CMOT A O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse
10 CMOT B O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse
11 CMOT-A O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse
12 CMOT-B O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse
14 FD SOL(ACT) O 24 V DC OFSOL: actuate
15 FD SOL(RET) O 24 V DC OFSOL: return
17 REV SOL(ACT) O 24 V DC SBPSOL: actuate
18 REV SOL(RET) O 24 V DC SBPSOL: return
Connected
to the
switchback
feedshift
solenoid,
eject feed-
shift sole-
noid,
original feed
switch, origi-
nal set
switch and
original set
LED PWB.
2 REV JCT SOL O 24 V DC SBFSSOL: On/Off
4 EJ JCT SOL O 24 V DC EFSSOL: On/Off
6 FD SW I 5 V DC OFSW: On/Off
7 G(5V) - - Signal ground
8 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
9 SET SW I 5 V DC OSSW: On/Off
11 LED- O 5 V DC OSLEDPWB (red): On/Off
13 LED PWB(GN) O 5 V DC OSLEDPWB (green): On/Off
3J9
2-3-4
Connected
to the origi-
nal feed
clutch, origi-
nal switch-
back switch,
DP timing
switch, origi-
nal size
length
switch and
original size
width switch.
2 FD CL O 24 V DC OFCL: On/Off
4 REV SW I 5 V DC OSBSW: On/Off
7 TMG SW I 5 V DC DPTSW: On/Off
10 SZ DET I 5 V DC OSLSW: On/Off
13 SZ SW A I 5 V DC OSWSW: On/Off
YC5 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
Connected
to DP safety
switch 1 and
2.
2 N.C. - - Not used
3 R24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
4 N.C. - - Not used
5 COV SF OPEN I 5 V DC DPSSW1: On/Off
6 DF SF OPEN I 5 V DC DPSSW2: On/Off
3J9
2-4-1
2
-4
A
p
p
e
n
d
ix
e
s
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
1

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

f
e
e
d

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

1
:

F
e
e
d
i
n
g

a
n

A
4
/
1
1
"

x

8
1
/
2
"

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

i
n

s
i
n
g
l
e
-
s
i
d
e
d

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

m
o
d
e
1
5
1
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
A
c
c
u
r
e
t
e
:

O
N
5
9
6

p
u
l
s
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

s
i
z
e

(
i
n

a
u
t
o

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
)
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
2
0
1
5

p
u
l
s
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
N
e
x
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
L
e
a
d
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
T
r
a
i
l
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
D
P

S
T
A
R
T
R
e
a
d
i
n
g
O
F
S
O
L
O
F
C
L
O
F
M
O
C
M
O
F
S
W
O
S
B
S
W
D
P
T
S
W
O
V
S
Y
N
C
3J9
2-4-2
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
2

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

f
e
e
d

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

2
:

F
e
e
d
i
n
g

a
n

A
4
/
1
1
"

x

8
1
/
2
"

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

i
n

s
i
n
g
l
e
-
s
i
d
e
d

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

m
o
d
e
D
P

S
T
A
R
T
R
e
a
d
i
n
g
O
F
S
O
L
1
5
O
F
C
L
1
0
O
F
M
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
O
C
M
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
O
F
S
W
O
S
B
S
W
D
P
T
S
W
O
V
S
Y
N
C
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
A
c
c
u
r
a
t
e
:

O
N
5
9
6

p
u
l
s
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

s
i
z
e

(
i
n

a
u
t
o

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
)
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
2
0
1
5

p
u
l
s
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
?
?
?
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
?
?
?
N
e
x
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
L
e
a
d
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
T
r
a
i
l
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
N
e
x
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
3J9
2-4-3
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
3

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

f
e
e
d

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

3
:

F
e
e
d
i
n
g

t
w
o

A
4
/
1
1
"

x

8
1
/
2
"

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
s

s
u
c
c
e
s
s
i
v
e
l
y

i
n

s
i
n
g
l
e
-
s
i
d
e
d

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

m
o
d
e
1
5
1
0
1
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
A
c
c
u
r
a
t
e
:

O
N
5
9
6

p
u
l
s
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

s
i
z
e

(
i
n

a
u
t
o

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
)
L
e
a
d
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

f
i
r
s
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
L
e
a
d
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

s
e
c
o
n
d

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
T
r
a
i
l
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

s
e
c
o
n
d

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
T
r
a
i
l
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f

f
i
r
s
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
N
e
x
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
?
?
?
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
?
?
?
5
9
6

p
u
l
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

s
i
z
e

(
i
n

a
u
t
o

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
)
N
e
x
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
2
0
1
5

p
u
l
s
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
C
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g

f
i
r
s
t

p
a
g
e

s
t
a
r
t
C
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g

s
e
c
o
n
d

p
a
g
e

s
t
a
r
t
5
0
4

p
u
l
s

o
f

O
C
M
D
P
S
T
A
R
T
R
e
a
d
i
n
g
O
F
S
O
L
O
F
C
L
O
F
M
O
C
M
O
F
S
W
O
S
B
S
W
D
P
T
S
W
O
V
S
Y
N
C
3J9
2-4-4
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
4

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

f
e
e
d

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

4
:

F
e
e
d
i
n
g

t
w
o

A
4
R
/
8
1
/
2
"

x

1
1
"

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
s

s
u
c
c
e
s
s
i
v
e
l
y

i
n

d
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
i
d
e
d

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

m
o
d
e
D
P

S
T
A
R
T
R
e
a
d
i
n
g
O
F
S
O
L
1
5
0
S
B
P
S
O
L
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
S
B
F
S
S
O
L
E
F
S
S
O
L
O
F
C
L
1
0
O
F
M
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
2
0
1
0
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
O
C
M
1
0
3
3
3
3
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
0
3
3
3
3
3
0
O
E
S
W
O
S
B
S
W
D
P
T
S
W
O
V
S
Y
N
C
1
5
0
1
5
0
1
5
0
2
2
0
1
8
0
A
c
t
u
a
t
e
:

O
N
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
5
9
6

p
u
l
s
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
A
c
t
u
a
t
e
:

O
N
A
c
t
u
a
t
e
:

O
N
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

s
i
z
e
(
i
n

a
u
t
o

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
)
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

s
i
z
e
(
i
n

a
u
t
o

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
)
L
e
a
d
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f
f
i
s
r
t

f
a
c
e
L
e
a
d
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f
s
e
c
o
n
d

f
a
c
e
T
r
a
i
l
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f
f
i
s
r
t

f
a
c
e
T
r
a
i
l
i
n
g

e
d
g
e

o
f
s
e
c
o
n
d

f
a
c
e
2
5
0

p
u
l
s
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
w
i
s
e
2
5
0

p
u
l
s
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
N
e
x
t

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
C
l
o
c
k
w
i
s
e
2
0
1
5

p
u
l
s
R
e
t
u
r
n
:

O
N
3J9
2-4-5
List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name
Part No.
Alternative
part No.
Fig.
No.
Ref.
No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
DP forwarding pulley ROLLER FEED 303J906010 3J906010 4 27
DP feed pulley ROLLER FEED 303J906010 3J906010 4 27
DP separation pulley ROLLER FEED 303J906010 3J906010 4 27
DP registration roller ROLLER REGISTRATION 303JC08040 3JC08040 6 56
Original feed switch PARTS,SWITCH FEED SP 303JC94040 3JC94040 4 17
Upper original conveying roller UPPER ROLLER CONVEYING 303JC08050 3JC08050 6 30
Lower original conveying roller LOWER ROLLER CONVEYING 303JC08060 3JC08060 6 32
Middle original conveying roller INNER ROLLER CONVEYING 303JC08070 3JC08070 6 19
Original conveying guide GUIDE READING 3C008010 - 6 9
DP timing switch PARTS,SENSOR TIMING SP 303JC94050 3JC94050 6 22
Eject roller ROLLER EJECT 303JC08080 3JC08080 6 39
Switchback roller ROLLER LOOP 303JC08090 3JC08090 5 6
Original set switch SENSOR ORIGINAL 3H627240 - 3 12
Original holder mat PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04200 3JC04200 1 38
3J9
2-4-6
Periodic maintenance procedures
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Test copy
and test print
Perform at the maxi-
mum copy size
Clean Every service.
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Original feed
section
DP forwarding pulley Clean or
replace
Every service. Clean with alcohol.
Replace every 200,000
P.1-5-3
DP feed pulley Clean or
replace
P.1-5-3
DP separation pulley Clean or
replace
P.1-5-4
DP registration roller Clean Every service. Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Original feed switch Clean Every service. Air blow.
Pulleys Check or
clean
Every service. Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Guide Clean Every service. Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Original con-
veying sec-
Lower original convey-
ing roller
Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Upper original convey-
ing roller
cloth.
Middle original convey-
ing roller
cloth.
Original conveying
guide
cloth.
DP timing switch Clean Every service Air blow.
Pulleys Check or
clean
Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Guide Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
3J9
2-4-7
*Equipped with the machine.
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Original eject
section
Eject roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Switchback roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Pulleys Check or
clean
Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Original table Original set switch Clean Every service Air blow.
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Covers Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Original holder mat Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Slit glass* Check or
clean
Every service Clean with a dry cloth. (Do not
clean with alcohol nor wet
cloth)
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Other Sensors Clean Every service Air blow.
3J9
2-4-8
Wiring diagram
S
B
F
S
S
O
L
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
FD CL
R24V 4-1
4-2
REV JCT SOL
3-1
3-2
R24V
1
2
O
F
C
L
1
2
D
P
S
S
W
2
1
3
2
DPRDY
DPSCLK
5V
5V
SGND
3.3V
PG
24V
DPSDI
DPSDO
3.3V
12V
PG
DPTMG
DPSEL
8
2
4
9
1
14
3
13
5
10
7
11
6
12
15
SGND
16
RDY
SCLK
SDI
5V
24V
R5V
PG
24V
SEL
SDO
SETOUT
SG
PG
DPVSYNC
DPFEED
N.C.
8
2
4
9
1
14
3
13
5
10
7
11
6
12
15
16
E
F
S
S
O
L
EJ JCT SOL
3-3
3-4
R24V
1
2
O
F
S
W
1
3
2
R5V
G(5V)
3-5
3-6
3-7
FD SW
O
S
S
W
1
3
2
5V
G(5V)
3-8
3-9
3-10
SET SW
O
S
L
E
D
P
W
B
3
1
2
LEDPWB(AMBER)
G(5V)
3-11
3-12
3-13 LED PWB(GN)
O
S
B
S
W 1
3
2
R5V
G(5V) 4-3
4-4
4-5
REV SW
D
P
T
S
W
1
3
2
R5V
G(5V) 4-6
4-7
4-8
TMG SW
1
3
5
2
4
6 1
3
5
2
4
6
R5V
G(5V) 4-9
4-10
4-11
SZ DET
R5V
G(5V) 4-12
4-13
4-14
SZ SW A
O
S
L
S
W 1
3
2
O
S
W
S
W
3
1
2
R24V
R24V
FMOT A
FMOT B
FMOT-A
FMOT-B
1
3
5
2
4
6
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
1
3
5
2
4
6
O
F
S
O
L
1
3
2
FD SOL(RET)
R24V 2-13
2-14
2-15
FD SOL(ACT)
1
3
2
O
F
M
O
C
M
S
B
P
S
O
L
1
3
2
REV SOL(RET)
R24V 2-16
2-17
2-18
REV SOL(ACT)
1
3
2
R24V
R24V
CMOT A
CMOT B
CMOT-A
CMOT-B
D
P
S
S
W
1
1
3
2
N.C.
24V
N.C.
R24V
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
DF SF OPEN
COV SF OPEN 5-5
5-6
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
5
2
4
6 1
3
5
2
4
6
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PGND
SGND
PGND
DPEND
24V
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
RDY
SCLK
SDI
5V
24V
R5V
PG
24V
SEL
SDO
SG
PG
DPVSYNC
DPFEED
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
D-21
D-9
D-2
D-15
D-19
D-11
D-7
D-18
D-6
D-5
D-17
D-4
D-3
D-16
M
a
c
h
i
n
e
JS-710
3KN
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-2
1-2 Installation
1-2-2 Unpacking...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication...................................................................................................................1-4-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1
(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2
2-1-1 Construction of each section...................................................................................................................2-1-1
(1) Paper ejection to the job separator tray ............................................................................................2-1-2
(2) Paper conveying to the optional finisher ...........................................................................................2-1-2
2-3-1 Job main PWB........................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-1
3KN
1-1-1
1-1 Specifications
Type................................................ Enclosed
Number of trays .............................. One tray
Tray capacity................................... 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
)
Paper sizes..................................... 11 x 17", 8 1/2 x 14", 11 x 8 1/2", 8 1/2 x 11", 7 1/4 x 10 1/2", 5 1/2 x 8 1/2", 8 1/2 x 13",
8 1/2 x 13 1/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Folio
Paper type .....................Weight: 60 - 105 g/m
2
Types: standard, recycled, color, thin, letterhead
Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine
22 7/16" (W) x 22 7/16" (D) x 9 1/2" (H)
Weight............................................. 2.3 kg or less/5.06 lbs. or less
3KN
1-1-2
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
1. Job separator tray
2. LED
3KN
1-1-3
Paper path
3KN
1-1-4
3KN
1-2-1
1-2 Installation
onto the machine.
3KN
1-2-2
1-2-2 Unpacking
1. Outer case
2. Pad A
3. Job separator
4. Job separator pad
5. Plastic bag
6. Upper left cover JS
7. Plastic bag
8. Cover left OP roll
9. Plastic bag
10. Guide plate
11. Plastic bag
12. Front left cover JS
13. Pad B
14. Plastic bag
15. Retainer
16. Plastic bag
17. Fixing plate F
18. Fixing plate R
19. M4 x 10 tap-tight S
screws
20. M4 x 8 tap-tight S screws
21. Plastic bag
22. Pad C
23. Job separator tray
24. Plastic bag
26. Plastic bag
27. Bar-code labels
3KN
1-3-1
the numeric keys.
or numeric keys.
Start
End
selected.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
3KN
1-3-2
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U030
Checking the operation of the motors
Description
Drives each motor.
Description
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated. The operation starts.
Two or more motors can be selected.
3. To stop operation, an item is selected again or press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U031
Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Displays the ON/OFF status of each paper detection switch on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
To check the operation of the switches for paper conveying.
Method
1. Press the start key. A list of switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Completion
Display Motor
Conveying Motor Paper feed/developing MOTOR BK (PF/DEVM-BK) and MP motor
(MPM) are turned on.
Color Dev Motor Developing motor CMY (DEVM-CMY) is turned on.
Fixing Motor Fuser motor (FUM) is turened on.
Eject Motor (Normal) Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise.
Eject Motor (Reverse) Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterwise.
Option Eject Motor Job eject motor (JOBEM) is turned on.
Duplex Motor Duplex motor (DUM) is turned on.
Display Sensor
MPF_UNIT MP tary switch (MPTSW)
MPF_FEED1 MP paper feed switch (MPPFSW)
MPF_FEED2 MP paper conveying switch (MPPCSW)
FEED 1 Feed switch 1 (FSW1)
REGIST Regist switch (RSW)
BELT Transfer detection sensor (TRDS)
EXIT Eject switch (ESW)
DUPLEX 1 Duplex jam detection switch (DUJDSW)
DUPLEX 2 Jam detection sensor (JDS)
OVERFLOW Paper full sensor (PFS)
JOB SEP Job eject switch (JBESW)
3KN
1-3-3
U033
Checking the operation of the solenoids
Description
Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
2. Select the solenoid to be operated. The selected solenoid turns on and off.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Solenoid
Branch Inner Tray Feedshift solenoid 1 (FSSOL1)
Eject Branch Solenoid Feedshift solenoid 2 (FSSOL2)
MPT Pick up Solenoid MP solenoid (MPSOL)
3KN
1-3-4
3KN
1-4-1
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation
panel.
To remove the jammed paper, open the left cover, conveying unit.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
time
Job separa-
tor
51
Misfeed in job separator
eject section
The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified
time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
1105ms
The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified
time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.
1105ms
52
Misfeed in feedshift sec-
tion
During paper switchback operation, the feedshift switch
(FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on.
822ms
JBESW
FSSW
3KN
1-4-2
(3) Paper misfeeds
(1)
A paper jam in the
eject section is indi-
cated as soon as the
power switch is
turned on.
copy paper is caught
around feedshift switch, job
eject switch.
Check visually and remove it, if any.
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Feedshift switch/job eject switch
(2)
A paper jam in the
eject section is indi-
cated during copying
(jam in job separator
eject section).
Jam code 51
Broken switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch.
Feedshift switch/job eject switch
(3)
A paper jam in the
feedshift section is
indicated during
copying (jam in feed-
shift section).
Jam code 52
Defective feedshift switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and
3KN
1-4-3
(1)
The job eject motor
does not operate.
tor terminals.
Broken the gear. Check visually and replace the gear if necessary.
Defective job eject motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the job eject motor
operates when YC5-1, YC5-2, YC5-3 and YC5-4 on the job main
PWB go low. If not, replace the job eject motor.
Defective job main PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC5-1, YC5-2, YC5-3
and YC5-4 on the job main PWB go low. If not, replace the job
main PWB.
Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC32-18 on the engine
PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB.
(2)
The feedshift sole-
noid 1/2 does not
operate.
Broken solenoid coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid.
tor terminals.
Defective job main PWB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if following terminals on
the job main PWB go low. If not, replace the job main PWB.
Feedshift solenoid 1: YC4-1, 3 on the job main PWB
Feedshift solenoid 2: YC2-1, 3 on the job main PWB
Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if following terminals on
the engine PWB go low. If not, replace the engine PWB.
Feedshift solenoid 1: YC32-12, 13 on the engine PWB
Feedshift solenoid 2: YC32-15, 16 on the engine PWB
3KN
1-4-4
(1)
Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Check if the contact between the job eject pul-
ley and job eject roller is correct.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
(2)
Abnormal noise is heard.
Check if the job eject pulley, job eject roller
and gears operate smoothly.
Grease the bearings and gears.
3KN
2-1-1
2-1-1 Construction of each section
The job separator consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the paper path to eject printed paper to
the job separator tray.
Figure 2-1-1 Job separator
Figure 2-1-2 Job separator block diagram
(1) Feedshift guide 2
(2) Job eject roller
(3) Job eject pulley
(4) Lower finisher eject roller
(5) Upper finisher eject roller
(6) Job separator tray
(7) Job eject switch (JBESW)
(8) Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW)
JBEM
FSSOL2
FSSOL1
JBMPWB
Y
C
2
-
2
,
3
Y
C
4
-
1
,
3
Y
C
3
-
2
Y
C
3
2
-
2
Y
C
5
-
1
,
2
,
3
,
4
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
1
/
2
_
D
R
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
1
/
2
_
D
R
J
O
B
_
E
X
I
T
_
J
A
M
S
E
T
_
J
O
B
Y
C
3
2
-
5
J
O
B
_
L
E
D
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
A
/
B
/
A
N
/
B
N
EPWB
(machine)
JBESW
EPDSW
LEDPWB
3KN
2-1-2
(1) Paper ejection to the job separator tray
Printed pages are delivered to the job separator as the feedshift guide is maneuvered by feedshift solenoids 1 and 2
(FSSOL1/2). The paper delivered in the job separator is driven towards the job seprator tray as the job eject roller is
rotated by the job eject motor (JBEM).
Figure 2-1-3
(2) Paper conveying to the optional finisher
Printed pages are delivered to the job separator as the feedshift guide is maneuvered by feedshift solenoids 1 and 2
(FSSOL 1/2). The paper delivered in the job separator is driven to the finisher as the upper finisher eject roller is rotated by
the job eject motor (JBEM).
Figure 2-1-4
Feedshift
guide
Feedshift guide
Job eject roller
Job separator tray
Feedshift
guide
Feedshift guide
Upper finisher
eject roller
Optional
document
finisher
3KN
2-2-1
Figure 2-2-1
1. Job main PWB (FMPWB) ............................ Controls electrical components.
2. LED PWB (LEDPWB) .................................. Indicates the presence of paper on the job separator tray.
3. Job eject motor (JBEM) ............................... Drives the eject roller.
4. Feedshift solenoid 1 (FSSOL1).................... Switching the paper path.
5. Feedshift solenoid 2 (FSSOL2).................... Switching the paper path.
6. Job separator eject switch (JBESW)............ Detects a paper jam in the job separator.
7. Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW).... Detects the presence of paper on the job separator tray.
1
3
2
5
4
6
7
Machine rear Machine front Machine inside
3KN
2-2-2
3KN
2-3-1
2-3-1 Job main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Job main PWB block diagram
Figure 2-3-2 Job main PWB silk-screen diagram
Feedshift
solenoid1
Feedshift
solenoid2
Job eject
switch
LED PWB
Ejected paper
detection switch
Job eject
motor
OP_MOT_A/B/AN/BN
OP_MOT_
MODE/CLK/DR
OP1_SOL1_DR/OP1_SOL2_DR
OP2_SOL1_DR/OP2_SOL2_DR
JOB_LED
JOB_EXIT_JAM
SET_JOB
Engine PWB
(machine)
Job main PWB
Motor
driver
(U1)
+5V2
+24V3
YC5 YC2 YC3
3
1
2
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
3 1
4 1
Y
C
1
YC4
U1
3KN
2-3-2
YC1 1 OP_MOT_MODE I 0/5 V DC JBEM MODE signal
Connected
to the
machine
2 OP_MOT_CLK I 0/5 V DC
(pulse)
JBEM CLK signal
3 OP_MOT_DR I 0/5 V DC JBEM DR signal
4 +24V3 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
5 OP2_SOL1_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL2 (return): On/off
6 OP2_SOL2_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL2 (activate): On/off
8 OP1_SOL1_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL1 (return): On/off
9 OP1_SOL2_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL1 (activate): On/off
10 JOB_EJECT O 5 V DC Connection signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 JOB_EXIT_JAM O 0/5 V DC JBESW: On/off
YC2 1 +24V3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
Connected
to feedshift
solenoid 2
2 OP2_SOL2_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL2 (activate): On/off
3 OP2_SOL1_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL2 (return): On/off
YC3 1 +5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected
to the job
eject switch
2 JOB_EXIT_JAM I 0/5 V DC JBESW: On/off
3 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 OP1_SOL2_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL1 (activate): On/off
Connected
to feedshift
solenoid 1
2 +24V3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
3 OP1_SOL1_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL1 (return): On/off
YC5 1 OP_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC
(pulse)
Job eject motor drive control signal
Connected
to the job
eject motor
2 OP_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC
(pulse)
3 OP_MOT_AN O 0/24 V DC
(pulse)
4 OP_MOT_BN O 0/24 V DC
(pulse)C
3KN
2-4-1
2-4 Appendixes
Wiring diagram
Y
C
3
2
E
P
D
S
W
+
5
V
2
3
3
1
5
1
1
+
5
V
2
S
E
T
_
J
O
B
2
2
2
4
2
2
S
E
T
_
J
O
B
G
N
D
1
1
3
3
3
3
G
N
D
L
E
D
P
W
B

J
O
B
_
L
E
D
2
1
5
1
5
5
J
O
B
_
L
E
D
+
5
V
2
1
2
4
2
4
4
+
5
V
2
Y
C
3
G
N
D
3
3
1
3
G
N
D
J
O
B
_
E
X
I
T
_
J
A
M
2
2
2
2
J
O
B
_
E
X
I
T
_
J
A
M
+
5
V
2
1
1
3
1
+
5
V
2
Y
C
1
+
5
V
2
1
5
1
5
1
1
5
6
6
+
5
V
2
J
O
B
_
E
X
I
T
_
J
A
M
1
4
1
4
2
1
4
7
7
J
O
B
_
E
X
I
T
_
J
A
M
Y
C
4
G
N
D
1
3
1
3
3
1
3
8
8
G
N
D
R
e
t
u
r
n
3
3
3
3
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
1
_
D
R
R
e
t
u
r
n
G
N
D
1
2
1
2
4
1
2
9
9
G
N
D
+
2
4
V
3
2
2
2
2
+
2
4
V
3
G
N
D
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
0
1
0
G
N
D
A
c
t
i
v
a
t
e
1
1
1
1
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
2
_
D
R
A
c
t
i
v
a
t
e
R
e
t
u
r
n
A
c
t
i
v
a
t
e
J
O
B
_
E
J
E
C
T
1
0
1
0
6
1
0
1
1
1
1
J
O
B
_
E
J
E
C
T
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
2
_
D
R
9
9
7
9
1
2
1
2
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
2
_
D
R
Y
C
2
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
1
_
D
R
8
8
8
8
1
3
1
3
O
P
1
_
S
O
L
1
_
D
R
R
e
t
u
r
n
3
3
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
1
_
D
R
+
2
4
V
3
7
7
9
7
1
4
1
4
+
2
4
V
3
A
c
t
i
v
a
t
e
2
2
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
2
_
D
R
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
2
_
D
R
6
6
1
0
6
1
5
1
5
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
2
_
D
R
+
2
4
V
3
1
1
+
2
4
V
3
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
1
_
D
R
5
5
1
1
5
1
6
1
6
O
P
2
_
S
O
L
1
_
D
R
+
2
4
V
3
4
4
1
2
4
1
7
1
7
+
2
4
V
3
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
D
R
3
3
1
3
3
1
8
1
8
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
D
R
Y
C
5
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
C
L
K
2
2
1
4
2
1
9
1
9
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
C
L
K
A
1
1
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
A
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
M
O
D
E
1
1
1
5
1
2
0
2
0
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
M
O
D
E
B
2
2
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
B
A
N
3
3
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
A
N
E
P
W
B
(
m
a
c
h
i
n
e
)
B
N
4
4
O
P
_
M
O
T
_
B
N
J
B
M
P
W
B
F
S
S
O
L
1
F
S
S
O
L
2
J
B
E
M
Y
C
1
J
B
E
S
W
PF-710
3J4
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-2
1-2 Installation
1-2-2 Unpacking...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option) .....................................................................................................1-2-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-4
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1
1-5-2 Paper feed section..................................................................................................................................1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys ......................................1-5-2
(2) Replacing paper feeder paper width switch 1, 2 ...............................................................................1-5-5
(3) Replacing paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch ................1-5-7
(4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster.........................................................................................1-5-9
2-1-1 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................2-1-1
2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB.........................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-3 Appendixes
Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-2
3J4
1-1-1
1-1 Specifications
Paper supply method...................... Friction retard method (No. sheets: 500, 80 g/m
2
, 2 caddettes)
Paper size....................................... A3 to A5R, folio, 11" x 17" to 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
Supported paper ............................. Weight: 60 to 105 g/m
2
Types: standard, recycled, color
Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine.
23 5/16" (W) x 23 1/4" (D) x 12 3/8" (H)
Weight............................................. 26 kg/57.2 lbs
3J4
1-1-2
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
1. Cassette 3
2. Cassette 4
3. Left cover 3
3J4
1-1-3
Paper path
3J4
1-1-4
3J4
1-2-1
1-2 Installation
onto the machine.
3J4
1-2-2
1-2-2 Unpacking
1. Paper feeder
2. Retainer
3. CVM4 x 06 cross-head
binding screws
4. Pins
5. Stays
6. M4 x 10 TP screws
7. Outer case
8. Bottom pads
9. Upper pad
10. Stays
11. Machine cover
12. Rear spacer
13. Plastic bag
14. Bar code label
15. Plastic bag
3J4
1-2-3
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
Cassette heater (P/N 302FB25060): for 220 to 240 V specifications only
Cassette heater (P/N 302FB25050): for 120 V specifications only
Two (2) M4 x 8 S tight screws (P/N B1304060)
Procedure
1. Remove cassette 3 and 4.
2. Remove the three screws holding the paper
feeder rear cover and then the cover.
3. Pass the cassette heater cable to the
machine rear through the cable hole in the
machine right.
4. Attach the cassette heater using the two M4
x 8 S tight screws.
Figure 1-2-2
5. Insert the cassette heater connector into
the connector of the main harness.
6. Tidy up the desk dehumidifier cable using
the wire saddle and route the cable while
clipping the wire saddles into the holes in
the rear frame.
7. Refit the paper feeder rear cover.
8. Refit cassette 3 and 4.
Figure 1-2-3
M4 x 8
S tight screws
Cable hole
Cassette heater
Wire saddle Cable of paper feeder
Cable of cassette heater
3J4
1-2-4
3J4
1-3-1
the numeric keys.
or numeric keys.
Start
End
selected.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
3J4
1-3-2
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U247
Checking the operation of paper feeder
Description
Turns on motors and clutches of paper feeder.
Purpose
To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated.
When selecting the motor, the operation starts. To stop the operation, select the item again.
When selecting the clutch, each clutch is turned on for 1 s.
Completion
U901
Checking copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Completion
Display Motor and clutches
DESK FEED Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM)
CLUTCH FEED Paper feeder feed clutch (PFFCL)
CLUTCH U Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)
CLUTCH L Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
Display Description
BYPASS MP tray
CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1
DUPLEX Duplex unit
3J4
1-4-1
1-4 Troubleshooting
panel.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the left cover 3 to turn left cover 3 switch off and on.
Figure 1-4-1
time
Paper feed
section
12
No paper feed from cas-
sette 3
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified
time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning
on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned
back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the speci-
fied time.
1828 ms
13
sette 4
The paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn on within
the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2
(PFPFCL2) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned
off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn
on within the specified time.
1828 ms
24
Multiple sheets in cassette
3 paper feed section
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of
its turning on.
3960 ms
25
The paper feeder feed switch 1 (PFFSW) does not turn off
within specified time of its turning on.
3960 ms
PFPFCL1
PFFSW
FSW3
PFPFCL2
3J4
1-4-2
(3) Paper misfeeds
(1)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section is
indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from cassette
3).
Jam code 12
Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed pul-
ley, forwarding pulley and
separation pulley of cas-
sette 3 are deformed.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Broken feed switch 3 actua-
tor.
Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
Check if paper feeder paper
feed clutch 1 malfunctions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed
clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-
tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with
paper feeder paper feed
clutch 1.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
(2)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from cassette
4).
Jam code 13
Check if the paper feed pul-
ley, forwarding pulley and
separation pulley of cas-
sette 4 are deformed.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Broken paper feeder feed
switch actuator.
Defective paper feeder feed
switch.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feeder feed switch on
clutch 2.
(3)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in cassette 3).
Jam code 24
Defective paper feeder
paper feed clutch 1.
clutch 1.
Defective feed pulleys or
feed rollers.
Check visually and replace.
3J4
1-4-3
(4)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (multiple
Jam code 25
Defective paper feeder feed
switch.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feeder feed switch on
clutch 2.
feed rollers.
3J4
1-4-4
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on.
Code Contents
Remarks
C0420 Paper feeder communication error
A communication error from paper
feeder is detected 10 times in succes-
sion.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on
the paper feeder main PWB, and the conti-
nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or
engine PWB and check for correct opera-
tion.
C1030 Paper feeder lift motor 1 error
When optional cassette 3 is inserted,
paper feeder lift switch 1 does not turn
on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 1
turning on.
The lift overcurrent protective monitor
signal is detected above 500 ms during
driving the motor.
However, the first 1 s after paper feeder
lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from
detection.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
Check the connection of connector on the
engine PWB and the connector on the paper
feeder main PWB, and the continuity across
necessary.
Broken gears or
couplings of paper
feeder lift motor 1.
Replace paper feeder lift motor 1.
Defective paper
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace paper feeder lift motor 1.
Defective paper
feeder lift switch 1.
Check if YC1-5 on the paper feeder main
PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch
1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift
switch 1.
When optional cassette 4 is inserted,
paper feeder lift switch 2 does not turn
on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 2
turning on.
The lift overcurrent protective monitor
signal is detected above 500 ms during
driving the motor.
However, the first 1 s after paper feeder
lift motor 2 is turned on is excluded from
detection.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Broken gears or
couplings of paper
Replace paper feeder lift motor 2.
Defective paper
Defective paper
switch 2.
3J4
1-4-5
C1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error
When writing the data, the write data and
the read data is not continuously in
agreement three times.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Defective engine
PWB.
Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-29).
Defective paper
feeder.
Replace the paper feeder with another unit
and check the operation. If the operation is
normal, replace or repair paper feeder.
Code Contents
Remarks
3J4
1-4-6
(1)
The paper feeder
does not operate
when the main power
tor terminals.
Defective left cover 3
switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the left
cover 3 switch.
(2)
The paper feeder
drive motor does not
operate.
tor terminals.
drive motor.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if the paper feeder paper
conveying motor operates when YC4-3 on the paper feeder main
PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder drive motor.
main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if YC4-3 on the paper
feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main
PWB.
(3)
The paper feeder
paper feed clutch 1/2
or paper feeder
paper conveying
ate.
Broken clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch.
tor terminals.
main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if following terminals on
the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper
feeder main PWB.
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1: YC1-14
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2: YC1-13
Paper feeder paper conveying clutch: YC2-1
(4)
The paper feeder lift
motor 1/2 does not
operate.
Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
tor terminals.
(5)
The size of paper on
the cassette 3 is not
displayed correctly.
tor terminals.
paper length switch 1.
Check if YC3-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when the
paper feeder paper length switch 1 is turned on. If not, replace the
paper feeder paper length switch 1.
paper width switch 1.
Check for continuity between YC3-9 and YC3-1, YC3-2, and YC3-
3 on the paper feeder main PWB. If the continuity is unaffected by
movement of the width guides in the cassette 3 (i.e. either
remains present or remains absent), then replace the paper
feeder paper width switch 1.
(6)
The size of paper on
the cassette 4 is not
displayed correctly.
tor terminals.
paper length switch 2.
Check if YC3-8 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when the
paper feeder paper length switch 2 is turned on. If not, replace the
paper feeder paper length switch 2.
paper width switch 2.
Check for continuity between YC3-10 and YC3-4, YC3-5, and
YC3-6 on the paper feeder main PWB. If the continuity is unaf-
fected by movement of the width guides in the cassette 4 (i.e.
either remains present or remains absent), then replace the paper
feeder paper width switch 2.
3J4
1-4-7
(7)
The message
requesting covers to
be closed is dis-
played when the left
cover 3 is closed.
Poor contact of the left
cover 3 switch connector
terminals.
Defective left cover 3
switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If there is no continuity
when the left cover 3 switch is on, replace it.
(8)
Others.
Wiring is broken, shorted or
makes poor contact.
Check for continuity. If none, repair.
3J4
1-4-8
(1)
No primary paper feed.
Check if the surfaces of the following rollers
and pulleys are dirty with paper powder:
forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separa-
tion pulley, feed roller and feed pulley.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if the paper feed pulley or separation
pulley is deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2).
Check if the forwarding pulley is deformed. Replace (see page 1-5-2).
Electrical problem with the following electro-
magnetic clutches: paper feeder paper feed
clutches 1/2 and paper feeder paper convey-
ing clutch.
See page 1-4-6.
(2)
Skewed paper feed.
Width guide in the cassette installed incor-
rectly.
Check the width guide visually and remedy
Deformed width guide in the cassette. Check the width guide visually and remedy
or replace if it is deformed.
(3)
Multiple sheets of paper
are fed at one time.
Check if the separation pulley is deformed. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn
(see page 1-5-2).
Check if the paper is curled. Change the paper.
(4)
Paper jams.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying
path.
Check visually and remedy or replace any
deformed guides.
(5)
Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears operate
smoothly.
Grease the bushings and gears.
Check if the paper feeder paper feed clutches
1/2 and the aper feeder paper conveying
clutch are installed correctly.
Remedy.
3J4
1-5-1
(1) Precautions
charge.
3J4
1-5-2
1-5-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys
Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys as follows.
Procedure
Removing the primary paper feed units
1. Remove cassette 3 and 4.
2. Remove the two screws holding the lower
front cover and then the cover.
3. Remove the one screw from each of the pri-
mary paper feed units and then the units.
Figure 1-5-1
Removing the forwarding pulley
4. Remove the stopper and spring from the pri-
mary paper feed unit.
5. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the
direction the arrow, and remove from the pri-
mary paper feed unit.
Figure 1-5-2
Primary paper feed unit
Screws
Forwarding pulley
retainer
Stopper
Spring
3J4
1-5-3
6. Remove the stop ring from the forwarding
pulley retainer.
Remove the forwarding pulley from the for-
warding shaft.
Figure 1-5-3
Removing the paper feed pulley
7. Remove two stop rings.
8. Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of
the primary paper feed unit (in the direction
of the arrow) and remove the paper feed
pulley and gear.
Figure 1-5-4
Removing the separation pulley
9. Remove the stop ring from the rear of the
primary paper feed unit.
10. Pull the separation shaft toward the rear of
the machine (in the direction of the arrow)
and remove the separation pulley.
Figure 1-5-5
Stop ring
Forwarding shaft
Forwarding pulley retainer
Forwarding pulley
Paper feed shaft Paper feed pulley Gear
Stop rings
Stop ring Separation shaft Separation pulley
3J4
1-5-4
11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed and
separation pulleys.
12. Refit all removed parts.
Cautions:
When fitting the forwarding pulley, orient it
correctly as shown in figure 1-5-6.
When fitting the paper feed pulley and gear,
keep the blue end of the paper feed pulley
and the black end of the gear toward the
machine rear.
Figure 1-5-6
Forwarding pulley
Machine front Machine rear
3J4
1-5-5
(2) Replacing paper feeder paper width switch 1, 2
Replace paper feeder paper width switch 1 and 2 as follows.
Caution:
After replacing paper feeder paper width switch, be sure to perform (4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster.
Procedure
1. Remove the cassette.
2. Remove two screws and 8-pin socket from
the rear of the drawer.
3. Detach the 8-pin connector from the 8-pin
socket.
4. Remove the three screws holding the rack
adjuster.
5. While raising the cassette lift in the direction
of the arrow, remove the rack adjuster.
Figure 1-5-7
6. Remove two screws from the back of the
rack adjuster and then the paper feeder
paper width switch.
Figure 1-5-8
Screws
Rack adjuster
Cassette lift
8-pin connector
Screws
8-pin socket
Screws
Paper feeder
paper width
switch
3J4
1-5-6
7. Apply the specified grease to the printed
surface of the new paper feeder paper width
switch (shaded area in the diagram) and fit
the switch to the rack adjuster.
Figure 1-5-9
Apply the specified grease.
3J4
1-5-7
(3) Replacing paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch
Replace paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch as follows.
Procedure
2. Remove the cable from the retainer clamp.
3. Remove the three screws holding the
retainer and then the retainer.
4. Remove the two screws holding the rear
cover left retainer and then the retainer.
Figure 1-5-10
5. Remove stop rings and bearings from paper
feeder paper feed clutch 1 and 2.
6. Remove the stop ring from the paper feeder
paper conveying clutch.
Figure 1-5-11
Clamp
Screws
Screws Retainer
Rear cover
left retainer
Stop ring and bearing
Stop ring and bearing
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
Paper feeder
paper feed clutch 2
Stop ring
Paper feeder
paper conveying clutch
3J4
1-5-8
feeder drive motor retainer and then the
retainer.
Figure 1-5-12
8. Remove the connectors and then the
clutches.
Figure 1-5-13
9. Replace the clutches.
Caution:
When fitting the clutches, be sure to refit the
whirl-stops.
Paper feeder
drive motor retainer
Screws
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
Paper feeder
paper conveying clutch
Connector
Connector
Connector
Paper feeder
paper feed clutch 2
3J4
1-5-9
Yes
No
Select [Center Adjust] and then select
[Center (Feed 3)].
Press the interrupt key to output the
test pattern.
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter 034 using cursor up/down keys
or numeric key and press the start key.
Exit maintenance mode.
Start
End
Is the image correct?
<Reference value>
Deviation to the left or right:
1.5 mm or less
Loosen the three screws securing the
rack adjuster and change the position
of the adjuster.
If the test pattern output example
looks like 1, turn the adjusting screw
clockwise, move the adjuster in the
direction of the black arrow ( ).
If the test pattern output example
looks like 2, turn the adjusting screw
counterclockwise, move the adjuster
in the direction of the white arrow
( ).
Retighten the three screws securing
the rack adjuster.
(4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and the original on
the paper fed from the cassette.
Procedure
Figure 1-5-14
Figure 1-5-15 Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
Correct image Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Rack adjuster
Screws
Adjusting screw
3J4
1-5-10
3J4
2-1-1
2-1-1 Mechanical construction
The paper feeder feeds paper from either of its two cassettes to the machine. When paper is fed from cassette 3 of the
paper feeder, the paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) is operated to rotate the feed roller and pulley to carry the
paper into the machine.
Figure 2-1-1
(1) Forwarding pulley
(2) Paper feed pulley
(3) Separation pulley
(4) Feed roller
(5) Feed pulley
(6) Cassette lift
(7) Lift operating plate
(8) Upper feed guide
(9) Middle feed guide
(10) Lower feed guide
(11) Feed guide
(12) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
(PFPFCL1)
(13) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2
(PFPFCL2)
(14) Paper feeder paper conveying
clutch (PFCCL)
(15) Paper feeder paper switch 1
(PFPSW1)
(16) Paper feeder paper switch 2
(PFPSW2)
(17) Paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW)
(18) Paper feeder lift switch 1
(PFLSW1)
(19) Paper feeder lift switch 2
(PFLSW2)
(20) Paper feeder paper length switch 1
(PFPLSW1)
(21) Paper feeder paper length switch 2
(PFPLSW2)
(22) Paper feeder paper width switch 1
(PFPWSW1)
(23) Paper feeder paper width switch 2
(PFPWSW2)
3J4
2-1-2
Figure 2-1-2
PFCCL
PFFSW
PFPFCL1
PFPSW1
PFPFCL2
PFLSW1
PFMPWB
YC1-5
YC1-6
YC1-14
YC2-1
YC1-7
YC1-8
YC1-13
YC2-7
PFPSW2 PFLSW2
3J4
2-2-1
Figure 2-2-1 Layout of electrical parts
1. Paper feeder main PWB (PFMPWB) ........... Controls electrical parts.
2. Left cover 3 switch (LC3SW) ....................... Breaks the safety circuit when left cover 3 is opened, and resets paper
jam detection.
3. Paper feeder paper switch 1 (PFPSW1) ...... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 3.
4. Paper feeder paper switch 2 (PFPSW2) ...... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 4.
5. Paper feeder lift switch 1 (PFLSW1) ............ Detects the cassette lift of cassette 3 reaching the upper limit.
6. Paper feeder lift switch 2 (PFLSW2) ............ Detects the cassette lift of cassette 4 reaching the upper limit.
7. Paper feeder paper length switch 1
(PFPLSW1).................................................. Detects the length of paper in cassette 3.
8. Paper feeder paper length switch 2
(PFPLSW2).................................................. Detects the length of paper in cassette 4.
9. Paper feeder paper width switch 1
(PFPWSW1) ................................................ Detects the width of paper in cassette 3.
10. Paper feeder paper width switch 2
(PFPWSW2) ................................................ Detects the width of paper in cassette 4.
11. Paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) ............. Controls paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.
12. Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM)................ Drives the paper feeder.
13. Paper feeder lift motor 1 (PFLM1) ............... Drives the cassette lift of cassette 3.
14. Paper feeder lift motor 2 (PFLM2) ............... Drives the cassette lift of cassette 4.
15. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
(PFPFCL1)................................................... Primary paper feed from cassette 3.
(PFPFCL2)................................................... Primary paper feed from cassette 4.
17. Paper feeder paper conveying clutch
(PFCCL)....................................................... Conveys paper to the machine.
18. Paper feeder cassette heater* (PFCH) ........ Dehumidifies paper.
*Optional.
2
11
17
15
12
16
4 6
9
7
1
13
10
18
8
14
3 5
3J4
2-2-2
3J4
2-3-1
2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB diagram
PFDM LC3SW
PFFSW
From the machine
PFMPWB
CPU
(U1)
PFLM1
PFLM2
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
PFCCL
PFPSW1
PFPSW2
PFLSW1
PFLSW2
PFPLSW1
PFPLSW2
PFPWSW1
PFPWSW2
3J4
2-3-2
Figure 2-3-2 Paper feeder main PWB silk-screen diagram
Y
C
5
1
1
0
YC6
1
1 7
11
12
1
2
3
YC4
YC3
Y
C
2
1
7
1
8
1 2
1
5
1
6
Y
C
1
1 2
3J4
2-3-3
YC1 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFLSW1
Connected
to the paper
feeder paper
switch 1/2,
paper feeder
lift switch 1/
2 and paper
feeder paper
feed clutch
1/2
2 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFPSW1
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFLSW2
4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFPSW2
5 UCLLSW I 5/0 V DC PFLSW1: On/Off
6 UCPESW I 0/5 V DC PFPSW1: On/Off
7 LCLLSW I 5/0 V DC PFLSW2: On/Off
8 LCPESW I 0/5 V DC PFPSW2: On/Off
9 SGND - - Ground
10 SGND - - Ground
11 SGND - - Ground
12 SGND - - Ground
13 LFCL REM I 0/24 V DC PFPFCL2: On/Off
14 UFCL REM I 0/24 V DC PFPFCL1: On/Off
15 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL1
16 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL2
YC2 1 FCL REM I 0/24 V DC PFCCL: On/Off
Connected
to the paper
feeder paper
conveying
clutch,
paper feeder
feed switch
and paper
feeder lift
motor 1/2
2 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCCL
3 PGND - - Ground
4 LLM REM I 24 V DC PFLM2: On/Off
5 PGND - - Ground
6 ULM REM I 24 V DC PFLM1: On/Off
7 LFEED SW I 5 V DC PFFSW: On/Off
8 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFFSW
9 SGND - - Ground
10 NC - - Not used
11 NC - - Not used
12 NC - - Not used
13 SGND - - Ground
14 SGND - - Ground
15 UP SIG1 I ??? PFPSW1: On/Off
16 LO SIG1 I ??? PFPSW2: On/Off
17 UP SIG2 I ??? PFPSW1: On/Off
18 LO SIG2 I ??? PFPSW2: On/Off
3J4
2-3-4
YC3 1 UP DIG0 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW1: On/Off
Connected
to the paper
feeder paper
length
switch 1/2
and paper
feeder paper
width switch
1/2
2 UP DIG1 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW1: On/Off
3 UP DIG2 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW1: On/Off
4 LO DIG0 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW2: On/Off
7 UPCLE SW I 0/5 V DC PFPLSW1: On/Off
8 LOCLE SW I 0/5 V DC PFPLSW2: On/Off
9 SGND - - Ground
10 SGND - - Ground
11 SGND - - Ground
12 SGND - - Ground
YC4 1 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFDM
Connected
to the paper
feeder drive
motor
2 PGND - - Ground
3 ON O 0/5 V DC PFDM: On/Off
4 LOCK I 0/5 V DC PFDM lock signal
5 CLOCK O 0/5 V DC
(pulse)
PFDM clock signal
YC5 1 UFEED SW
Connected
to the
machine
2 READY
3 SDI
4 SDO
5 SCLK
6 5V
7 SGND - - Ground
8 PGND - - Ground
9 SEL
10 24V
YC6 1 24VR I 24 V DC/0V LC3SW: On/Off
Connected
to the left
cover 3
switch
2 NC - - Not used
3 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LC3SW
3J4
2-4-1
Part No.
Alternative
part No.
Fig.
No.
Ref.
No.
Feed roller ROLLER,VERTICAL CONVEYING 302AR07421 2AR07421 6 10
Feed pulley RIGHT PULLEY,FEED 33906660 - 4,5 36
Paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2AR07220 - 4,5 2
Separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 2AR07230 - 4,5 3
Forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 - 4,5 5
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 CLUTCH,FEED 32 303J444020 3J444020 6 9
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 CLUTCH,FEED 32 303J444020 3J444020 6 9
Paper feeder paper conveying
clutch
CLUTCH,FEED 32 303J444020 3J444020 6 9
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Paper con-
veying sec-
tion
Push paper sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Surface view sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Upper cover sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Paper conveying sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Adjusting hone position
sensor
Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray upper limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray lower limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Reverse sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with
alcohol.
Paper conveying belt Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with
alcohol.
Paper conveying roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with
alcohol.
Paddle Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with
alcohol.
Front static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres
to tip of brush, remove it.
Rear static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres
Reverse static
eliminator
Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres
Push paper lever
cushion
Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened
with alcohol.
3J4
2-4-2
Wiring diagram
1 7
PFPWSW1
PFPWSW2
2 8
YC3 YC2
4 4 5 3 1 1 UP DIG0 FCL REM 1 1 3 1
PFCCL
PFLM1
PFLM2
PFFSW
LC3SW
3 3 6 4 2 2 UP DIG1 2 2
2 2 7 1 3 3 UP DIG2 24VR 2 2 1 3
1 1 8 2 9 9 SGND 10 10
5 5 4 6 11 11
3 5 12 12
UP SIG2 17 17 5 5
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
1
SGND 13 13 4 4
2 UP SIG1 15 15 3 3
3
PGND 5 5 2 2
ULM REM 6 6
1 1
PFPLSW1
PFPLSW2
2 2 7 7 UPCLE SW
1 1 11 11 SGND
1 7 LO SIG2 18 18 5 5
2 8 SGND 14 14 4 4
4 4 5 3 4 4 LO DIG0 LO SIG1 16 16 3 3
3 3 6 4 5 5 LO DIG1 PGND 3 3 2 2
2 2 7 1 6 6 LO DIG2 LLM REM 4 4
1 1
1 1 8 2 10 10 SGND
5 5 4 6 LFEED SW 7 7 3 3 3
3 5 5V 8 8 2 2 2
SGND 9 9 1 1 1
1
2
3
2 2 8 7 UPCLE SW
1 1 12 11 SGND
YC1
16 16 24VR
14 14 UFCL REM
PFPSW1
PFLSW1
PFPSW2
PFLSW2
2 8 15 15 24VR
1 1 1 7
13 13 LFCL REM
2 2 4 6 2 2 5V
3 3 3 5 6 6 UCPESW
6 4
10 10 SGND
1 1 5 3
1 1 5V
2 2 8 2
5 5 UCLLSW
3 3 7 1
9 9 SGND
YC6
2 8 24VR 1 1 1
1 1 1 7 2 2
2 2 4 6 4 4 5V 24V 3
2
3 3
3 3 3 5 8 8 LCPESW
6 4 12 12 SGND Machine
1 1 5 3 3 3 5V YC5
2 2 8 2 7 7 LCLLSW UFEED SW 1 1 11 11 UFEED SW 8 UFEED SW
3 3 7 1 11 11 SGND READY 2 2 10 10 READY 7 READY
SDI 3 3 9 9 SDI 6 SDI
YC4 SDO 4 4 8 8 SDO 5 SDO
1 1 1 1 24VR SCLK 5 5 7 7 SCLK 4 SCLK
2 2 2 2 PGND 5V 6 6 5 5 SEL 3 SEL
PFDM 3 3 3 3 ON SGND 7 7 4 4 5V 2 5V
4 4 4 4 LOCK PGND 8 8 3 3 SGND 1 SGND
5 5 5 5 CLOCK
SEL 9 9 2 2 PGND 2 PGND
24V 10 10
1 1 24V 1 24V
PFCH
PFMPWB
1 1 12 12 AC(L) 1
2 2 6 6 AC(N)
AC(L)
AC(N) 3
3
2
1
3
2
1
PF-750
5H0
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-2
1-2 Installation
1-2-2 Unpacking...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heaters (option) ...................................................................................................1-2-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-4
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1
1-5-2 Paper feed section..................................................................................................................................1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2 .........................................................1-5-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly.........................................1-5-3
(3) Detaching and refitting paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2.......................................................1-5-3
(4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment).................................................1-5-4
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1
(3) Other electrical components..............................................................................................................2-2-3
2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB.........................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-2
5H0
1-1-1
1-1 Specifications
Paper supply method...................... Friction retard method (No. sheets: 3000, 80 g/m
2
)
Paper size....................................... 11" x 8 1/2", A4
Supported paper ............................. Weight: 60 - 105 g/m
2
Types: standard, recycled, color
Dimensions..................................... 23 5/16" (W) x 23 5/8" (D) x 12 3/8" (H)
585 (W) x 600 (D) x 314 (H)mm
Weight............................................. Approx. 50.6 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg
5H0
1-1-2
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
1. Lifts
2. Left cover 3
3. Cassette 3
4. Cassette front cover
5. Front and rear lateral size adjusters
5H0
1-1-3
Paper path
5H0
1-1-4
5H0
1-2-1
1-2 Installation
onto the machine.
5H0
1-2-2
1-2-2 Unpacking
1. 3000-sheet paper feeder
2. Outer case
3. Lower front pad
4. Lower rear pad
5. Support
6. Upper pad
7. Stay
8. Retainer
9. Pins
10. CVM4 x 06 cross-head
binding screws
11. M4 x 16 TP screws
12. Machine cover
13. Plastic bag
14. Plastic bag
5H0
1-2-3
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heaters (option)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
Two (2) cassette heaters (P/N xxxxxxxxxx): for 220 - 240 V specifications only
Two (2) cassette heaters (P/N xxxxxxxxxx): for 120 V specifications only
Two (2) cassette heater retainers (P/N 5A707690)
Six (6) M4 x 6 IT tap-tight (S-tight) screws (P/N 37611570)
Relay wire (P/N 5A707890)
Ten (10) wire saddles (P/N M2109000)
Procedure
1. Remove two screws from each of the right
cover and left cover 3 and then the covers.
2. Remove three screws holding the paper
3. Open the paper feeder.
4. Remove two screws holding the paper con-
veying unit assembly and then the assem-
bly.
Figure 1-2-2
5. Fit the cassette heaters to the cassette
heater retainers using two screws and wire
saddle for each.
6. Fit the cassette heater retainers to the left
and right of the paper feeder using one
screw for each.
Figure 1-2-3
7. Pull the cassette heater cable out to the
machine rear through the cable hole.
Screw
Screw
Paper conveying unit assembly
Machine left
Cassette heater
Wire saddle
Cassette heater retainer
Screws
Machine right
Cassette heater retainer
Cassette heater Screws
Wire saddle
5H0
1-2-4
8. Detach the open connector from the con-
nector of the main harness on the machine
rear.
Figure 1-2-4
9. Insert the cassette heater connectors into
the relay wire connectors.
10. Insert the main harness connector into the
relay wire connector.
11. Tidy up the cassette heater cable and relay
wire using eight wire saddles and route the
cable and wire while clipping the wire sad-
dles into the holes in the rear frame.
12. Refit the paper feeder rear cover.
13. Refit the right cover and left cover 3.
Figure 1-2-5
Open connector
Wire saddles
Wire saddles
Wire saddles
Relay wire
Wire saddle
5H0
1-3-1
the numeric keys.
or numeric keys.
Start
End
selected.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
5H0
1-3-2
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U208
Setting the paper size for the paper feeder
Description
Sets the size of paper used in 3000-sheet paper feeder.
Purpose
To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed.
Setting
2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or 11 x 8.5).
Initial setting: 11 x 8.5 (Inch specifications)
A4 (Metric specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
U247
Checking the operation of 3000-sheet paper feeder
Description
Turns on motors and clutches of 3000-sheet paper feeder.
Purpose
To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device.
Method
1. Press the start key..
2. Select the item to be operated.
When selecting the motor, the operation starts. To stop the operation, select the item again.
When selecting the clutch, each clutch is turned on for 1 s.
Completion
U901
Checking copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Completion
Display Motor and clutches
LCF FEED Paper feeder conveying motor (PFCM)
CLUTCH B Paper feeder conveying clutch (PFCCL)
CLUTCH P1 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)
CLUTCH P2 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
Display Description
BYPASS MP tray
CASSETTE 3 Cassette 3 (3000-sheet paper feeder)
CASSETTE 4 -
DUPLEX Duplex unit
5H0
1-4-1
1-4 Troubleshooting
panel.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the left cover 3 to turn left cover 3 switch off and on.
Figure 1-4-1
time
Paper feed
section
12
sette 3
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified
time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning
on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned
back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the speci-
fied time.
2393 ms
15
Jam in paper feeder hori-
zontal paper conveying
section 1
Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) does not turn on within spec-
ified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turn-
ing on.
963 ms
16
section 2
ified time of the paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) turning on .
1029 ms
17
section 3
ified time of the paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) turning on .
631 ms
19
Misfeed in paper feeder
paper conveying section
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within specified time of
paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) turning on.
1842 ms
24
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of
its turning on.
1867 ms
09
Paper feeder sequence
error
Sequence error is occurred between the machine and paper
feeder.
-
FSW3
PPSENS1
PPSENS3 PPSENS2
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
5H0
1-4-2
(3) Paper misfeeds
(1)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from cassette
3).
Jam code 12
tor.
Check if the clutch malfunc-
tions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the
if necessary.
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2, paper feeder paper conveying
clutch
clutch.
(2)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (jam in 3000-
sheet paper feeder
horizontal paper con-
veying section).
Jam code 15
Check if the paper side
guides are deformed.
Defective paper path sen-
sor 3.
With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the paper feeder main PWB,
check if CN6-11 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when
paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper
path sensor 3.
clutch 2.
(3)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
sheet paper feeder
veying section).
Jam code 16
sor 2.
path sensor 2.
clutch 1.
5H0
1-4-3
(4)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
sheet paper feeder
veying section).
Jam code 17
sor 1.
path sensor 1.
conveying clutch malfunc-
tions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper con-
veying clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check
the status and remedy if necessary.
paper feeder paper convey-
ing clutch.
(5)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (jam in
optional paper feeder
vertical paper con-
veying section).
Jam code 19
tor.
(6)
A paper jam in the
indicated during
copying (multiple
Jam code 24
clutch 1.
feed rollers.
5H0
1-4-4
Code Contents
Remarks
C0420 Paper feeder communication error
A communication error from paper
feeder is detected 10 times in succes-
sion.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on
the paper feeder main PWB, and the conti-
nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
tion.
A motor over-current signal is detected
continuously for 1 s or longer.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Paper feeder lift
motor 1 does not
rotate correctly (the
motor is over-
loaded).
Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
A motor over-current signal is detected
continuously for 1 s or longer.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Paper feeder lift
motor 2 does not
rotate correctly (the
motor is over-
loaded).
Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
C1120 Paper feeder left lift position problem
Paper feeder switch 2 does not turn on
within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 1
turning on.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Defective paper
switch 2.
Defective paper
The paper feeder
left lift does not rise
properly.
Check the gears and belts, and remedy if
necessary.
5H0
1-4-5
C1130 Paper feeder right lift position prob-
lem
Paper feeder switch 1 does not turn on
within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 2
turning on.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Defective paper
switch 1.
Defective paper
The paper feeder
right lift does not
rise properly.
Check the gears and belts, and remedy if
necessary.
C1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error
When writing the data, the write data and
the read data is not continuously in
agreement three times.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Defective engine
PWB.
Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-29).
Defective paper
feeder.
Replace the paper feeder with another unit
and check the operation. If the operation is
normal, replace or repair optional paper
feeder.
C2600 Paper feeder paper conveying motor
error
The lock signal of the motor is detected
avobe 450 ms.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
necessary.
Defective drive
transmission sys-
tem.
Check if the rollers and gears rotate
smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
tion.
Defective paper
feeder paper con-
veying motor.
Replace the paper feeder paper conveying
motor.
Code Contents
Remarks
5H0
1-4-6
(1)
The paper feeder
does not operate
when the main power
tor terminals.
(2)
The paper feeder
paper conveying
motor does not oper-
ate.
tor terminals.
paper conveying motor.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if the paper feeder paper
conveying motor operates when CN2-2 on the paper feeder main
PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder paper conveying
motor.
main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if CN2-2 on the paper
feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main
PWB.
(3)
The lift motor 1/2
does not operate.
Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
tor terminals.
main PWB.
Check if CN7-13 or CN7-6 on the paper feeder main PWB goes
low right after the cassette is installed. If not, replace the paper
feeder main PWB.
(4)
The paper feeder
paper feed clutch 1/2
or paper feeder
paper conveying
ate.
Broken clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch.
tor terminals.
main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if following terminals on
the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper
feeder main PWB.
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1: CN4-3
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2: CN4-1
Paper feeder paper conveying clutch: CN4-5
5H0
1-4-7
(1)
No primary paper feed.
Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1
or 2 is soiled with paper powder.
Check if paper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2
is soiled with paper powder.
or 2 is worn or deformed.
Check if paper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2
is worn or deformed.
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1, 2
or the paper feeder paper conveying clutch
malfunctions.
Remedy or replace.
(2)
Skewed paper feed.
Check if dpaper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2
is worn or deformed.
Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Remedy or replace.
(3)
Multiple sheets of paper
are fed at one time.
Paper is not loaded correctly. Correct.
(4)
Paper jams.
Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Remedy or replace.
(5)
Check if rollers and gears operate smoothly. Grease the bushings and gears.
Check for any abnormality with motors and
clutches.
Replace.
Check for any drive belt out of place. Remedy if necessary.
5H0
1-4-8
5H0
1-5-1
(1) Precautions
charge.
5H0
1-5-2
1-5-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2
Clean or replace paper feeder separation roller 1, 2 as follows.
Procedure
1. Open left cover 3.
2. Remove stop ring 1.
3. Remove the shaft.
4. Remove the paper feeder separation roller
assembly.
5. Remove stop ring 2 securing paper feeder
separation roller 2 and then the roller.
6. Remove stop ring 3 securing paper feeder
separation roller 1 and then the roller.
7. Clean or replace paper feeder separation
roller 1 and 2.
Figure 1-5-1
Stop ring 1
Paper feeder separation roller 2
Paper feeder
separation roller 1
Shaft
Stop ring 2
Stop ring 3
Stop ring 1
p
a
p
e
r
fe
e
d
e
r
se
p
a
ra
tio
n
ro
lle
r
a
sse
m
b
ly
5H0
1-5-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly
Replace the desk upper or lower paper width switches as follows.
Procedure
1. Open the cassette.
2. Remove left cover 3.
3. Remove two screws holding the paper
feeder paper conveying unit assembly and
then the assembly.
Figure 1-5-2
(3) Detaching and refitting paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2
Clean or replace paper feed roller 1, 2 as follows.
Procedure
1. Turn the paper feeder paper conveying unit
over.
2. Remove the stop ring while lifting the paper
feed roller section.
3. Pull out the shifting shaft and then paper
feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2.
4. Clean or replace paper feeder paper feed
rollers 1 and 2.
Figure 1-5-3
Paper feeder
paper conveying
unit assembly
Screw
Screw
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 1
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 2
Shifting shaft
Stop rings
5H0
1-5-4
(4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment)
Perform the following adjustment if the center lines of the copy image and the copy paper are misaligned.
Procedure
1. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
2. Run maintenance item 034 and output the test pattern.
3. If the center of the paper and that of the test pattern output do not meet the reference value,
perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less
4. Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder and loosen the three screws securing the adjuster.
If the test pattern output looks like A, move the adjuster in the direction of the black arrow ( )
and retighten the three screws.
If the test pattern output looks like B, move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow ( )
and retighten the three screws.
Figure 1-5-4
5. Close the cassette.
6. Output a test pattern again.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the centers of the paper and the test pattern meet the reference value.
<Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less
8. If the position of the adjuster is changed, adjust the front cover position.
If the front cover position is not proper, the cassette may not be fixed with the magnet or the
gap between the front cover and the paper feeder may be opened.
9. Loosen the five screws.
10. Move the position of the front cover by the amount of divisions of the level that corresponds to
the movement of the adjuster (amount of movement of the level) using the level.
11. Retighten the five screws
Figure 1-5-5
Adjuster
Screw Screw
Screw
A B
Screws Screws
Screw
Front cover
Divisions
Divisions
Divisions Divisions Divisions
Adjuster
5H0
2-1-1
The paper feeder consists mainly of the left and right cassettes and separation section.
The left cassette paper feed section sends paper from the lift to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2. When the left cas-
sette becomes empty, the right cassette paper feed section conveys paper onto the lift of the left cassette.
The paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2 in the separation section convey paper received from the left cassette paper
feed section into the machine, preventing multiple sheets from being fed at one time.
Figure 2-1-1
(1) Paper feeder paper feed roller 1
(2) Paper feeder paper feed roller 2
(3) Pickup arm
(4) Paper conveying base
(5) Lift
(6) Paper guide U
(7) Left cover 3
(8) Paper feeder separation roller 1
(9) Paper feeder separation roller 2
(10) Paper guide D
(11) Guide pulley
(12) Air damper
(13) Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1)
(16) Paper empty sensor (PESENS)
5H0
2-1-2
Left cassette paper feed
As the paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) turns on, the drive is transmitted to paper feeder separation rollers 1
and 2, starting paper feed from the left cassette.
The paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2 ensure that the paper is fed one sheet at a time and that it is fed into the
machine correctly. To prevent multiple sheets from being fed, there is a torque limiter on paper feeder separation roller 2.
When the left cassette is empty, its lift serves as a guide for the paper being conveyed from the right cassette lift.
Figure 2-1-2 Left cassette paper feed section
Figure 2-1-3 Left cassette paper feed section block diagram
Paper path
PFCCL
Paper feeder separation roller 1
Machine
Paper feeder
separation
roller 2
PFCCL
CN4-5
PFMPWB
PFCCL
5H0
2-1-3
Right cassette paper feed
As the last sheet in the left cassette is fed, paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) and paper feeder paper feed
clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turn on for paper feed from the right cassette. Paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2 start to rotate to
convey paper from the right cassette onto the left cassette lift.
Figure 2-1-4 Right cassette paper feed section
Figure 2-1-5 Right cassette paper feed section block diagram
PPSENS1
PPSENS2 PPSENS3
PFPFCL1 PFPFCL2
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 1
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 2
Paper path
PPSENS1 PPSENS2 PPSENS3
PFPFCL1 PFPFCL2
PPSENS1
PPSENS2
PPSENS3
PFPFCL2
PFPFCL1
CN6-5
CN6-8
CN6-11
CN4-1
CN4-3
PFMPWB
5H0
2-1-4
Raising and lowering the lifts
The following is a description of the right cassette lift operating mechanism. The left cassette lift operates in the same
manner.
Lift motor 2 (LM2) drives the right lift belt assembly that winches the belt up and hence raises the lift until it is stopped by
level switch 2 (LSW2).
When paper is loaded on the lift and the deck is closed, the lift is raised until level switch 2 (LSW2) turns on.
When level switch 2 (LSW2) is turned off as the paper on the lift is used, lift motor 2 (LM2) starts to raise the lift until the
switch turns on.
Figure 2-1-6 Raising and lowering the lift
When the cassette is opened for removing a jammed paper or other purposes, the winch shaft is released from its holder
on lift motor 2 (LM2), allowing the lift to descend under its own weight. The air damper buffers the impact of the descend-
ing lift.
Figure 2-1-7 Lift block diagram
Level switch 2
Air damper Lift belt assembly
Winch shaft
Lift
Lift motor 2
LSW1
LSW2
LM1
LM2
CN5-4
CN5-7
CN7-13
CN7-6
PFMPWB
LM2
LSW1 LSW2
LM1
5H0
2-1-5
Detecting the paper level
The lift rises as paper in the cassette is used.
When the remaining number of sheets in either right or left cassette reduces to around 100 to 250 sheets, the projection
on the lift belt assembly pushes against the sensor lever which turns the relevant paper level detection sensor 1 or 2
(PLDSENS1/2) on.
When both paper level detection sensors 1 and 2 (PLDSENS1/2) have turned on, the message [Low on paper.] is shown
on the machine message display. This message is not shown when only one of them is on.
As more copies are made with the message on, paper path sensors 1, 2 and 3 (PPSENS1/2/3) or the paper empty sensor
(PESENS) start to detect absence of paper, and the message [Add paper in cassette 3.(Add paper cassette 3.)] is shown.
Figure 2-1-8 Detecting the paper level
Figure 2-1-9 Paper level detection system block diagram
Paper level
detection sensor
1 or 2 (PLDSENS1/2)
Sensor lever
Lift belt assembly
CN2-1
CN3-3
PFMPWB
PLDSENS1 PLDSENS2
5H0
2-1-6
5H0
2-2-1
(1) PWBs
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. Paper feeder main PWB (PFMPWB) ........... Controls electrical components and communications with the machine.
2. Sensor relay PWB (SENRYPWB)................
1
5H0
2-2-2
1. Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.
4. Paper empty sensor (PESENS)................... Detects the absence of paper in the right cassette.
5. Level switch 1 (LSW1) ................................. Detects the left cassette lift in the home position.
6. Level switch 2 (LSW2) ................................. Detects the right cassette lift in the home position.
7. Left cover 3 switch (LC3SW) ....................... Detects if left cover 3 is open or closed.
8. Paper feeder open/closed safety switch
(PFOSSW) ................................................... Detects if the paper feeder is open or closed.
9. Paper level detection sensor 1
(PLDSENS1)................................................ Detects the paper level in the left cassette.
10. Paper level detection sensor 2
(PLDSENS2)................................................ Detects the paper level in the right cassette.
7
1
2
5
3 8 4 6
9 10
5H0
2-2-3
(3) Other electrical components
Figure 2-2-3 Other electrical components
1. Paper feeder paper conveying clutch
(PFCCL)....................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2.
(PFPFCL1)................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder paper feed roller 1.
(PFPFCL2)................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder paper feed roller 2.
4. Paper feeder paper conveying motor
(PFCM) ........................................................ Drives the paper feeder.
5. Lift motor 1 (LM1)......................................... Raises the left cassette lift.
6. Lift motor 2 (LM2)......................................... Raises the right cassette lift.
7. Paper feeder cassette heater 1* (PFCH1) ... Dehumidifies paper in the left cassette.
8. Paper feeder cassette heater 2* (PFCH2) ... Dehumidifies paper in the right cassette.
*Optional.
7
1
4
3 2
8
5 6
5H0
2-2-4
5H0
2-3-1
2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB diagram
PF RXD
PF TXD
From the machine
24 V DC
5 V DC
PGND
SGND
PFCM
LM1
LM2
LM1
drive circuit
Paper feeder
paper
conveying
motor drive
circuit
Communication
circuit
Latch
CPU
(IC8)
PFMPWB
LED
drive circuit
ROM
PPSENS1
PPSENS2
PPSENS3
PESENS
LSW1
PFOSSW
LSW2
LC3SW
Oscillator
circuit
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
PFCCL
LM2
drive circuit
Reset circuit
PLDSENS2
PLDSENS1
PFSCL
Clutch
drive circuit
SENRYPWB
5H0
2-3-2
Figure 2-3-2 Paper feeder main PWB silk-screen diagram
1
9
C
N
1
1
1 3
15
CN6 CN3
C
N
4
1
6
1
0

1
C
N
3
1
7
8 1
CN2
5H0
2-3-3
CN1 1 FEED SW SIG I 0/5 V DC FSW3 On/Off signal from the machine
Connected
to the
machine
2 READY O 0/5 V DC Ready signal to the machine
3 SDO(IN) I 0/5 V DC
(pulse)
Serial communication signal from the machine
4 SDO(OUT) O 0/5 V DC
(pulse)
Serial communication signal to the machine
5 CLK I 0/5 V DC
(pulse)
Clock signal from the machine
6 SELECT I 0/5 V DC Select signal from the machine
7 DC5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power supply
8 SGND - - Signal ground
9 PGND - - Power ground
10 DC24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply
CN2 1 RS1_3 I 0/5 V DC PLDSENS1: On/Off
Connected
to the paper
level detec-
tion sensor
1 and paper
feeder paper
conveying
motor
3 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS1
4 PGND - - Power ground
5 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCM
6 MOT_ON O 0/24 V DC PFCM: On/Off
7 LD I 0/5 V DC
(pulse)
PFCM lock signal
CN3 1 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS2
Connected
to the paper
level detec-
tion sensor
2
3 RS2_3 I 0/5 V DC PLDSENS2: On/Off
YC4 1 P2_CL O 0/24 V DC PFPFCL2: On/Off
Connected
to the paper
feeder paper
feed clutch
1/2, paper
feeder paper
conveying
clutch and
paper feeder
separation
clutch
2 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL2
3 P1_CL O 0/24 V DC PFPFCL1: On/Off
4 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL1
5 B_CL O 0/24 V DC PFCCL: On/Off
6 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCCL
7 B_CL O 0/24 V DC PFSCL: On/Off
8 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFSCL
CN5 1 FRONT_COVER I 5/0 V DC PFOSSW: On/Off
Connected
to the sen-
sor relay
PWB and
level switch
2
3 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SENRYPWB
4 LEVEL_S1 I 0/5 V DC LSW1: On/Off
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 LEVEL_S2 I 0/5 V DC LSW2: On/Off
9 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LSW2
5H0
2-3-4
CN6 1 SIDE_COVER I 5/0 V DC LC3SW: On/Off
Connected
to the paper
path sensor
1/2/3 and
paper empty
sensor
3 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LC3SW
4 PPS0_CLK O 5/4 V DC
(pulse)
PPSENS1 clock signal
5 PPS0 I 5/0 V DC
(pulse)/0 V DC
PPSENS1: On/Off
6 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS1
(pulse)
8 PPS1 I 5/0 V DC
(pulse)/0 V DC
PPSENS2: On/Off
(pulse)
11 PPS2 I 5/0 V DC
(pulse)/0 V DC
PPSENS3: On/Off
13 EMP_S_CLK O 5/4 V DC
(pulse)
PESENS clock signal
14 EMP_S I 5/0 V DC
(pulse)/0 V DC
PESENS: On/Off
15 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PESENS
CN7 1 RS2_2 I 0/5 V DC LM2: On/Off
Connected
to the Lift
motor 1/2
3 RS2_1 I 0/5 V DC LM2: On/Off
4 NC - - Not used
5 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LM2
6 LMOT2 I 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
7 NC - - Not used
11 NC - - Not used
12 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LM1
13 LMOT1 O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
5H0
2-4-1
2-4 Appendixes
Part No.
Alternative
part No.
Fig.
No.
Ref.
No.
Push paper sensor H-PICK ROLLER 5A707600 - 3 22
Surface view sensor PULLEY,PAPER FEED 5FH06010 - 3 49
Upper cover sensor PULLEY,SEPARATION 5FH06020 - 3 42
Paper conveying sensor C-PICK PULLEY 5A707580 - 2 18
Paper path sensor 1/2/3 TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 3 9
Paper empty sensor SNS-SPI-338 5A707980 - 3 3
Level switch 1/2 SNS-SPI-338 5A707980 - 3 3
Paper feeder open/closed safety
switch
SNS-SPI-338 5A707980 - 3 3
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Paper con-
veying sec-
tion
sensor
alcohol.
alcohol.
alcohol.
alcohol.
Reverse static
eliminator
Push paper lever
cushion
with alcohol.
5H0
2-4-2
Wiring diagram
PFPFCL2
2
2 1
1
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
1
2 2
1
1
2
3
4
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
PFPFCL1
2
2 1
1
PFCCL
PFOSSW
2
2 1
1
PFSCL
2
2 1
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
LSW1
LSW2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
LC3SW
1
2
3
1
2
3
PPSENS1
PPSENS2
PPSENS3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
PESENS
1
2
3
1
2
3
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
RD
RD
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

RD
RD
RD
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
4

V
P
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
5
.
1

V
*
R
E
S
E
T
N
C
P
F

T
X
D
S
G
N
D
P
F

R
X
D
S
G
N
D
F
S
W
3

S
I
G
N
C
2
4

V
P
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
5

V
*
R
E
S
E
T
P
F

T
X
D
S
G
N
D
P
F

R
X
D
S
G
N
D
F
S
W
3

S
I
G
CN2
LD
CM
24 V
PGND
5 V
SGND
PLDSENS1
CN7
LM2 SW2
SGND
LM2 SW1
NC
24 V
LM2
NC
LM1 SW2
SGND
LM1 SW1
NC
24 V
LM1
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN3
5 V
SGND
PLDSENS2
CN4
PFPFCL2
24 V
PFPFCL1
24 V
PFCCL
24 V
CN5
PFOSSW
SGND
5 V
LSW1
SGND
5 V
LSW2
SGND
5 V
NC
CN6
LC3SW
SGND
5 V
PPSENS1 CLK
PPSENS1
5 V
PPSENS2 CLK
PPSENS2
5 V
PPSENS3 CLK
PPSENS3
5 V
PESENS CLK
PESENS
5 V
Wire color Mark
Brown
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Orange
Light blue
Gray
Black
Purple
BN
YW
BE
WE
RD
OE
LB
GY
BK
PE
Machine
PFCH1 PFCH2
Y
W
B
E
G
Y
R
D
B
K
L
B
G
Y
O
E
G
Y
B
N
CN1
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
PFCM
LM2
PLDSENS1
PLDSENS2
LM1
PFMPWB
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
EW
WE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
Drawer connectors
PE
PE
PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
DF-730
5H1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-2
1-2 Installation
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation......................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure........................................................................................................................1-2-2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad ...............................................................................................................1-2-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-3
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-5
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1
(2) Cleaning the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller ..............................................................1-5-2
(1) Reverse section.................................................................................................................................2-1-1
(2) Processing section ...........................................................................................................................2-1-6
(3) Exit tray section...............................................................................................................................2-1-10
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1
(3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-3
(4) Solenoids...........................................................................................................................................2-2-4
(5) Stapler section...................................................................................................................................2-2-5
2-3-1 Finisher main PWB.................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No.1....................................................................................................................................2-4-1
Timing chart No.2....................................................................................................................................2-4-2
Timing chart No.3....................................................................................................................................2-4-3
Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-6
5H1
1-1-1
1-1 Specifications
Type................................................ Floor model
Number of trays .............................. One tray
Tray capacity................................... When not stapling:
A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 500 sheets
A4R, A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 1000 sheets*
*A4R and 8 1/2" x 11" during sorting or offset ejection: 500 sheets
(For B5R, job offset is not available.)
When stapling 2 or 9 sheets:
A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 70 to 28 sets
A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 70 to 50 sets
A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 25 to 12 sets
A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 45 to 16 sets
A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 45 to 16 sets
Stapling limit.................................... A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), Folio, 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 20 sheets
A4R, A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 30 sheets
22" (W) x 20 11/16" (D) x 36 1/16" (H)
Weight............................................. Approx. 25 kg/55 lbs (with attachments)
5H1
1-1-2
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
1. Exit tray
2. Exit tray extension
3. Finisher release button
4. Reverse cover
5. Upper cover
6. Stapler cover
7. Staple holder
5H1
1-1-3
1. Reverse section
2. Processing section
3. Exit tray section
5H1
1-1-4
5H1
1-2-1
1-2 Installation
onto the machine.
5H1
1-2-2
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
1. Document finisher
2. Latch catch
3. Rail retainer
4. Guide rail
5. Joints
6. Outer case
7. Top plate
8. Pad
9. Pad
10. Pad
11. Pad
12. Pad
13. Pad
14. Pad
15. Pad
16. Hinge joints
17. Skid
18. Pad
19. Supports
21. Clamp
22. M4 x 6 binding screws
23. M4 x 10 binding screws
5H1
1-2-3
(2) Remove the tapes and pad
When installing the machine, be sure to remove the following tapes and pad.
1. Remove the two tapes holding the reverse
cover.
2. Remove the two tapes holding the reverse
guide.
3. Remove the tape holding the upper cover.
4. Open the upper cover and remove the pad.
5. Remove the tape holding the exit tray exten-
sion.
6. Open the stapler cover and remove the tape
holding the stapler.
7. Remove the tape holding the signal cable
and the air mat.
Figure 1-2-2
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Air mat
Tape
Tape
5H1
1-2-4
5H1
1-3-1
the numeric keys.
or numeric keys.
Start
End
selected.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
5H1
1-3-2
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U905
Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of optional DP or finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of optional DP and finisher.
Method
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
DP
FINISHER (document finisher)
Completion
Display Description
ADP Number of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP Number of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
Display Description
CP CNT Number of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated
PUNCH -
STACK -
SADDLE -
5H1
1-4-1
1-4 Troubleshooting
panel.
To remove the jammed paper, detach the finisher from the machine.
To reset the paper misfeed detection, turn the joint switch (JSW) off and on.
Figure 1-4-1
PES1
PES2
REVS
PCS
EXS
5H1
1-4-2
time
Finisher 81
Paper entry sensor nonar-
rival jam
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a speci-
fied time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was
received.
2627ms
82
Jam in stapler
The staple home position sensor (STSPS) is not turned on
within the specified time when driving the staple motor (STM).
1s
83
Exit sensor stay jam
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off
within specified time of its turning on.
1680ms
In the offset or staple mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not
turned off within specified time of its turning on.
5375ms
91
Finisher cover open
The front cover, top cover or tray C is opened when starting
the finisher operation.
The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the cen-
terfold operation.
The mail box cover is opened when starting the operation.
-
92
Exit sensor non-arrival
jam
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned on
even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sen-
sor (PES) was turned on.
1770ms
93
Reverse sensor jam
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn on within specified
time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
1071ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned on within specified
time.
435ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn off within specified
time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning off.
622ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned off within specified
Depends on
paper size
94
Paper entry sensor stay/
remaining jam
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within specified
Depends on
paper size
95
Paper conveying sensor
jam
The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on within
specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning on.
735ms
The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off within
specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning off.
1004ms
5H1
1-4-3
(3) Paper misfeeds
(1)
A paper jam in docu-
ment finisher is indi-
(paper jam during
paper insertion to the
finisher).
Jam code 81
Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
Defective paper entry sen-
sor.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1 and CN14-3 on the finisher main
PWB, check if CN14-2and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB
remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and
off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.)
Defective finisher main
PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
(2)
(finisher stapler jam).
Jam code 82
Defective staple home posi-
tion sensor.
Run maintenance item U241 and turn the taple home position
sensor on and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the
corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in
reverse.
(3)
(eject sensor stay
jam).
Jam code 83
Defective eject sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if
CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the
eject sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject sen-
sor.
Check if the paper convey-
ing motor malfunctions.
Check and remedy.
Check if the exit roller and
exit pulley contact each
other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the exit guide is
deformed.
Check and remedy.
PWB.
(4)
(eject sensor non-
arrival jam).
Jam code 92
Defective eject sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if
exit sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the exit sensor.
Check.
Check if the exit roller and
exit pulley contact each
other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the exit guide is
deformed.
Check and remedy.
PWB.
5H1
1-4-4
(5)
(reverse sensor jam).
Jam code 93
Defective reverse sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check
if CN14-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the
reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse
sensor.
Check if the reverse motor
malfunctions.
Check.
Check if the reverse roller
and reverse pulley contact
each other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the reverse guide
is deformed.
Check and remedy.
PWB.
(6)
(paper entry sensor
stay jam).
Jam code 94
Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
sor.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main
PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the main PCB remains low
or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does,
replace the paper entry sensor.
Check if the paper entry
guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
PWB.
(7)
(paper conveying
sensor jam).
Jam code 95
Defective paper conveying
sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if
paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
paper conveying sensor.
Check.
ing roller and paper convey-
ing pulley contact each
other.
Check and remedy.
ing guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
PWB.
5H1
1-4-5
Code Contents
Remarks
C0440 Document finisher communication
problem
A communication error from document
finisher is detected 10 times in succes-
sion.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
the engine PWB and the connector on the
finisher main PWB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB or engine
PWB and check for correct operation.
C8030 Tray upper limit detection problem
When the tray elevation motor raises a
tray, the ON status of the tray upper limit
sensor is detected.
The tray upper limit
sensor/push paper
sensor/surface
view sensor con-
nector makes poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
nuity within the connector cable. If none,
remedy or replace the cable.
Defective tray
upper limit sensor/
push paper sensor/
surface view sen-
sor.
Replace the sensor.
Defective finisher
main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check
for correct operation.
C8140 Tray elevation motor problem
When the tray elevation motor is driving,
the ON status of the tray lower limit sen-
sor or surface view sensor cannot be
detected even if a specified time has
elapsed.
The tray elevation
motor connector
makes poor con-
tact.
The tray elevation
motor malfunc-
tions.
Replace the tray elevation motor.
The tray lower limit
sensor/push paper
sensor/surface
view sensor con-
nector makes poor
contact.
Defective tray
lower limit sensor/
push paper sensor/
surface view sen-
sor.
Replace the sensor.
Defective finisher
main PWB.
5H1
1-4-6
C8170 Adjustment motor problem
When the adjustment motor is driving,
the ON status of the adjustment home
position sensor cannot be detected even
if a specified time has elapsed.
When adjustment operation starts, the
ON status of the adjustment home posi-
tion sensor is not detected.
The adjustment
motor connector
makes poor con-
tact.
Defective adjust-
ment motor.
Replace adjustment motor.
The adjustment
home position sen-
sor connector
makes poor con-
tact.
Defective adjust-
ment home posi-
tion sensor.
Replace the adjustment home position sen-
sor.
Defective finisher
main PWB.
C8210 Stapler problem
When the stapler motor is driving, the
ON status of the stapler home position
sensor cannot be detected even if a
specified time has elapsed.
The stapler con-
nector makes poor
contact.
The stapler is
blocked with a sta-
ple.
Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the
cartridge and the stapling section of the sta-
pler.
The stapler is bro-
ken.
Replace the stapler and check for correct
operation.
Defective finisher
main PWB.
C8440 Sensor adjusting problem
The sensor cannot be adjusted within
the specified range.
The paper entry
sensor connector
makes poor con-
tact.
Defective paper
entry sensor.
Replace the paper entry sensor and check
The optical path of
the paper entry
sensor is blocked
by foreign matter.
Remove the foreign matter.
Defective finisher
main PWB.
C8460 EEPROM problem
Reading from or writing to EEPROM
cannot be performed.
Defective
EEPROM or fin-
isher main PWB.
Code Contents
Remarks
5H1
1-4-7
(1)
The reverse motor
does not operate.
tor terminals.
Defective reverse motor. Check if the reverse motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at
CN15-1 and CN15-2, and drive pulses are at CN15-3, CN15-4,
CN15-5 and CN15-6 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the
reverse motor.
PWB.
Check if CN15-3, CN15-4, CN15-5 and CN15-6 on the finisher
main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(2)
The paper convey-
ing motor does not
operate.
tor terminals.
motor.
Check if the paper conveying motor rotates when 24 V DC is
present at CN7-5 and CN7-6, and drive pulses are at CN7-1,
CN7-2, CN7-3 and CN7-4 on the finisher main PWB. If not,
replace the paper conveying motor.
PWB.
Check if CN7-1, CN7-2, CN7-3 and CN7-4 on the finisher main
PWB go low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(3)
The adjustment
ate.
tor terminals.
Defective adjustment motor. Check if the adjustment motor rotates when drive pulses are at
CN8-1, CN8-2, CN8-3 and CN8-4 on the finisher main PWB. If
not, replace the adjustment motor.
PWB.
Check if CN8-1, CN8-2, CN8-3 and CN8-4 on the finisher main
PWB go low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(4)
The tray elevation
ate.
tor terminals.
Defective tray elevation
motor.
Check if the tray elevation motor rotates when 24 V DC is present
at CN11-7 and CN11-8 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace
the tray elevation motor.
PWB.
Check if 24 V DC is present at CN11-7 and CN11-8 on the finisher
main PWB. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(5)
The separate sole-
noid does not oper-
ate.
Defective separate solenoid
coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the separate
solenoid.
tor terminals.
PWB.
Check if CN12-3 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not,
replace the finisher main PWB.
(6)
The flapper solenoid
does not operate.
Defective flapper solenoid
coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the flapper
solenoid.
tor terminals.
PWB.
(7)
The large gear sole-
noid does not oper-
ate.
Defective large gear sole-
noid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the large gear
solenoid.
tor terminals.
PWB.
5H1
1-4-8
(8)
The paddle solenoid
does not operate.
Defective paddle solenoid
coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paddle
solenoid.
tor terminals.
PWB.
Check if CN9-2 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace
the finisher main PWB.
(9)
The surface view
solenoid does not
operate.
Defective surface view
solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the surface
view solenoid.
tor terminals.
PWB.
Check if CN6-2 and CN6-3 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If
not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(10)
Paper jams when the
main power switch is
turned on.
an paper is caught around
the paper entry sensor,
reverse sensor, paper con-
veying sensor or exit sen-
sor.
Check visually and remove it, if any.
sor.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main
PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB
remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and
off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.
Defective reverse sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check
reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse
sensor.
sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if
paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
paper conveying sensor.
Defective exit sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if
exit sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the exit sensor.
PWB.
(11)
[Out of staples. Add
staples.] is displayed
when the main power
Defective stapler empty
sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN10-6 on the finisher main PWB, check
stapler empty sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
stapler empty sensor.
tor terminals.
Defective stapler cartridge
sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN10-5 on the finisher main PWB, check
stapler cartridge sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
stapler cartridge sensor.
PWB.
5H1
1-4-9
(1)
No paper conveying.
Paper outside specifications is used. Use only paper conforming to the specifica-
tions.
Check if the surfaces of the paper conveying
roller, paper conveying pulleys, reverse roller
and reverse pulleys are soiled with paper
powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol, if they are
soiled.
Check if the paper conveying roller, paper
conveying pulleys, reverse roller and reverse
pulleys are deformed.
Replace any deformed or worn pulleys or
roller.
(2)
No paper ejection to the
exit tray.
tions.
Check if the surfaces of the exit roller and pul-
leys are soiled with paper powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol, if they are
soiled.
Check if the exit roller and pulleys are
deformed.
Replace any deformed or worn pulleys or
roller.
(3)
Paper jams.
tions.
Check if the paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper conveying roller and pul-
leys, or reverse roller and pulleys make
proper contact.
Remedy if there are any problems.
Check if the exit roller and pulleys make
proper contact.
Remedy if there are any problems.
(4)
Check if rollers, pulleys and gears all operate
smoothly.
Apply grease to the bushings and gears.
Check to see if the vibration noise of each
motor is abnormally high.
Readjust the tension of the motor bracket.
5H1
1-4-10
5H1
1-5-1
(1) Precautions
charge.
5H1
1-5-2
(2) Cleaning the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller
Follow the procedure below to clean the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the two screws holding the front
cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-5-1
2. Remove the two screws holding the rear
cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-5-2
Front cover
Rear cover
5H1
1-5-3
3. Open the upper cover and release the front
and rear stopper.
4. Release the fitting portions of the upper
cover and then remove the cover.
Figure 1-5-3
5. Remove the two screws and connector
and then remove the paper conveying
guide unit.
6. Clean the paper conveying roller and
reverse exit roller.
Figure 1-5-4
Stopper
Stopper
Upper cover
Fitting portion
Fitting portion
Connector
Paper conveying
guide unit
5H1
1-5-4
5H1
2-1-1
(1) Reverse section
The reverse section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-1 and conveys paper that is fed from the machine into
the finisher to the reverse unit or the processing section. Feedshift to the reverse unit or the processing section is
erformed with the flapper that is activated by the flapper solenoid (FSOL).
In the reverse mode, paper that is fed into the finisher is temporarily fed to the reverse unit, is reversed, and then is con-
veyed to the processing section with the rotation of the reverse roller and reverse exit roller.
Figure 2-1-1 Reverse section
(1) Paper entry sensor 1 (PES1)
(2) Paper entry sensor 2 (PES2)
(3) Flapper
(4) Flapper
(5) Reverse roller
(6) Reverse pulley
(7) Separate solenoid (SSOL)
(8) Reverse sensor (REVS)
(9) Reverse exit roller
(10) Paper conveying pulley
5H1
2-1-2
Figure 2-1-2 Reverse section block diagram
CNJJ.NO
CNJJ.CM
CNJJ.NC
BE
BE
CNHH. 1
CNHH. 2
PES2
+5V
BK
BK
CNGG. 1
CNGG. 2
PES1
+5V
BK
BK
CN00. 1
CN00. 2
CN00. 3
CN00. 4
CNPP. 6
CNPP. 5
CNPP. 4
CNPP. 3
+24V
+24V
CNCC. 1
CNCC. 2
CNDD. 2
CNDD. 1
SSOL
+24V
CNAA. 1
CNAA. 2
CNBB. 2
CNBB. 1
FSOL
+24V
RM A
RM_A
CN00. 5
CN00. 6
CNPP. 2
CNPP. 1
RM B
RM_B
BE
BE
BE
BE
CNKK. 1
CNKK. 2
CNLL. 2
CNLL. 1
PES2
PES1
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BK
WE
RD
YW
BE
OE
BE
BE
BE
CN14. 1
CN14. 2
CN14. 3
CN14. 4
CN14. 5
CN14. 6
CN14. 8
+5V
PES1
+5V
PES2
+5V
SGND
N.C.
CN14. 7 REVS
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BK
BK
CN15. 6
CN15. 5
CN15. 4
CN15. 3
CN15. 2
CN15. 1
RM A
RM_A
RM B
RM_B
+24V
+24V
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN13. 1
CN13. 2
CN13. 3
CN13. 4
CN13. 5
CN13. 6
DC+24V
JSW
J_PTH
RC_PTH
DC+24V
RCSW
YW
RD
BE
BE
YW
RD
RD
YW
BE
CN12. 4
CN12. 3
CN12. 2
CN12. 1
+24V
SSOL
+24V
FSOL
BE
BE
BK
BK
FSOL
SSOL
REVS
PES2
PES1
RM
RCSW
JSW
Reverse unit
FMPWB
CNJJ.NO
CNJJ.CM
CNJJ.NC
RD
YW
BE
BE
BE
BE
CNFF. 1
CNFF. 2
CNFF. 3
REVS
SGND
+5 V
5H1
2-1-3
Operation without reversing
1. When the operation start signal is received, the flapper solenoid (FSOL) is turned on to open the non-reverse
path.
2. After the machine exit signal is received, the reverse motor (RM) is turned on at the machine exit speed.
3. When the leading edge of paper arrives at the paper entry sensor (PES), the paper conveying motor (PCM) is
turned on at the machine exit speed.
4. The reverse exit roller that is rotated by the drive of the reverse motor (RM) conveys paper to the processing sec-
tion.
Figure 2-1-3 Operation without reversing
PES2
PES1
Reverse exit
roller
Paper path
FSOL:ON
Flappar
5H1
2-1-4
Operation with reversing
1. When the operation start signal is received,
the flapper solenoid (FSOL) is turned off to
open the reverse path.
2. After the machine exit signal is received, the
reverse motor (RM) is turned on at the
machine exit speed.
Figure 2-1-4
3. When the leading edge of paper arrives at
the paper entry sensor (PES), if the sepa-
rate solenoid (SSOL) is in the suction state,
the paper is separated. If the paper convey-
ing motor (PCM) stops, the motor is turned
on at the machine exit speed.
Figure 2-1-5
PES2
PES1
Paper path
FSOL:OFF
Flappar
SSOL:ON
Reverse
roller
Reverse
pulley
Paper path
PES2
PES1
5H1
2-1-5
4. Suction of the separate solenoid (SSOL) is
activated just before the trailing edge of
paper passes through the machine exit
roller.
5. When the trailing edge of paper passed
through the machine exit roller, the reverse
motor (RM) is accelerated to pull the paper
out.
Figure 2-1-6
6. After the paper stops at the reverse position,
the reverse motor (RM) is rotated in the
reverse direction to convey the paper to the
processing section.
7. After the leading edge of paper arrives at the
reverse sensor (REVS), the separate sole-
noid (SSOL) is separated to receive the next
paper.
Figure 2-1-7
SSOL:OFF
Reverse
roller
Paper path
Reverse
pulley
SSOL:OFF
REVS
Reverse
roller
Reverse exit
roller
Paper path
5H1
2-1-6
(2) Processing section
The processing section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-8 and discharges paper conveyed from the finisher
reverse section to the exit tray. Also this section performs processing in the bundle discharge mode and the staple mode.
Figure 2-1-8 Processing section
(1) Paper conveying sensor (PCS)
(2) Paper conveying roller
(3) Paper conveying pulley
(4) Bundle discharge unit
(5) Paddle
(6) Paper conveying belt
(7) Processing tray
(8) Exit pulley
(9) Exit roller
(10) Exit sensor (EXS)
(11) Adjustment home position sen-
sor (ADHPS)
(12) Large gear solenoid (LGSOL)
5H1
2-1-7
Figure 2-1-9 Processing section block diagram
CN T.NC
BE
RD
CN T.CM
CN T.NO
BE
BE
BE
CN E. 1
CN E. 2
CN E. 3
PCS
SGND
+5V
BE
BE
BE
CN F. 1
CN F. 2
CN F. 3
ADHPS
SGND
+5V
BK
BK
BK
CN G. 1
CN G. 2
CN G. 3
CN N. 4
CN N. 3
CN N. 2
CN N. 1
CN M. 1
CN M. 2
CN M. 3
CN M. 4
ADM B
ADM_B
ADM A
ADM_A
CN R. 3
CN R. 2
CN R. 1
CN Q. 1
CN Q. 2
CN Q. 3
LGSOL
LGSOL
PDSOL
ADM
PCM
EXS
ADHPS
PCS
BDUSW
+24V
N.C.
CN P. 2
CN P. 1
CN O. 1
CN O. 2
PDSOL
+24V
EXS
SGND
+5V
BK
CN L. 1
CN L. 2
CN L. 3
CN L. 4
CN L. 5
CN L. 6
CN L. 7
CN L. 8
CN L. 9
CN L.1
CN L.11
PCM A
N.C.
+24V
N.C.
PCM_A
N.C
PCM B
N.C.
+24V
N.C.
PCM_B
BK
BK
WE
WE
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
RD
YW
BE
RD
BN
YW
BE
OE
BE
BE
BE
BE
FMPWB
YW
CN 3. 1
CN 3. 4
DC+24V
BDUSW
BE
CN 4. 6 PCS
CN 4. 4 +5V
CN 4. 5 SGND
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN 5. 1
CN 5. 2
CN 5. 3
CN 5. 7
+5V
SGND
ADHPS
N.C.
CN 5. 4 +5V
CN 5. 5 SGND
BK
BK
CN 5. 6 EXS
BK
BK
BN
YW
CN 7. 1
CN 7. 2
CN 7. 3
CN 7. 6
PCM A
PCM_A
PCM B
+24V
CN 7. 4 PCM_B
CN 7. 5 +24V
OE
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN 8. 4
CN 8. 3
CN 8. 2
ADM B
ADM_B
ADM A
CN 8. 1 ADM_A
BE
BE
BE
CN 9. 1
CN 9. 2
CN 9. 3
+24V
PDSOL
N.C.
BK
BK
CN17. 1
CN17. 2
+24V
LGSOL
5H1
2-1-8
Bundle discharge operation
1. When paper is conveyed into the processing
section, the large gear solenoid (LGSOL)
Figure 2-1-10
2. Before the trailing edge of paper passes
through the conveying roller, the paper con-
veying motor (PCM) is decelerated to dis-
charge the paper to the processing tray.
3. The paddle solenoid (PDSOL) is turned on
and the paddle rotates one turn to carry the
paper into the processing tray.
4. The adjustment motor (ADM) is started to
adjust the paper using the adjustment plate.
Figure 2-1-11
Bundle discharge unit
LGSOL:ON
Paper path
Paddle
Processing tray
PDSOL:ON
Paper path
Paper conveying
roller
5H1
2-1-9
5. When adjustment of the last sheet of the
bundle is completed, the large gear solenoid
(LGSOL) is turned off to lower the bundle
discharge unit.
6. The conveying belt and the exit roller rotate
to discharge the bundle of paper to the exit
tray.
Figure 2-1-12
Bundle discharge unit
Exit roller
LGSOL:OFF
Paper path
Paper conveying
belt
5H1
2-1-10
(3) Exit tray section
The exit tray section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-13 and stocks paper discharged from the processing
section using rotation of the exit roller and exit pulley.
The upper limit position and the lower limit position of the exit tray are detected with the tray upper limit sensor (TULS) and
the tray lower limit sensor (TLLS). Also the paper stock quantity is detected with the push paper sensor (PPS) and the sur-
face view sensor (SVS).
Figure 2-1-13 Drum section
(1) Exit pulley
(2) Exit roller
(3) Push paper lever
(4) Push paper sensor (PPS)
(5) Surface view sensor (SVS)
(6) Rack
(7) Rack gear
(8) Tray elevation motor (TEM)
(9) Tray upper limit sensor (TULS)
(10) Tray lower limit sensor (TLLS)
5H1
2-1-11
Figure 2-1-14 Exit tray section block diagram
BE
BE
BE
CN X. 1
CN X. 2
CN X. 3
TULS
SGND
+5 V
BK
BK
BK
CN Y. 1
CN Y. 2
CN Y. 3
TLLS
SGND
+5 V
BE
BE
CN Z. 2
CN Z. 1
TEM+
TEM-
CN I. 4
CN I. 3
CN I. 2
CN I. 1
CN H. 1
CN H. 2
CN H. 3
CN H. 4
N.C.
SVSOL2
SVSOL1
+24V
PPS
SVS
SVSOL
BK
BK
BK
YW
BE
RD
BK
BK
BK
CN J. 1
CN J. 2
CN J. 3
SVS
SGND
+5V
BE
BE
BE
CN K. 1
CN K. 2
CN K. 3
PPS
SGND
+5V
CN11. 1
CN11. 2
CN11. 3
CN11. 4
CN11. 5
CN11. 6
CN11. 8
TEM+
TEM-
TLLS
SGND
+5V
TULS
+5V
CN11. 7 SGND
BE
BE
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
BE
Tray unit
TEM
TLLS
TULS
FMPWB
BK
BK
BK
CN 6. 1
CN 6. 2
CN 6. 3
CN 6. 9
+24V
SVSOL1
SVSOL2
PPS
CN 6. 4 +5V
CN 6. 5 SGND
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
CN 6. 6 SVS
CN 6. 7 +5V
CN 6. 8 SGND
BE
5H1
2-1-12
Exit tray up/down operation
1. Paper surface empty status
Sensor status
Push paper sensor (PPS): OFF
Surface view sensor (SVS): OFF
Exit tray control
Tray elevation motor (TEM): Forward rotation.
Exit tray: Moves up.
This status occurs when paper is removed from the exit tray.
Figure 2-1-15 Paper surface empty status
2. Paper surface off status
Sensor status
Push paper sensor (PPS): ON
Surface view sensor (SVS): OFF
Exit tray control
Tray elevation motor (TEM): OFF
Exit tray: Does not move.
If this status is detected when the exit tray is moving up or down, the tray is stopped.
Figure 2-1-16 Paper surface off status
Push paper
lever
PPS:OFF
SVS:OFF
TEM: Forward rotatioin
Push paper
lever
PPS:ON
SVS:OFF
TEM:OFF
5H1
2-1-13
3. Paper surface on status
Sensor status
Push paper sensor (PPS): ON
Surface view sensor (SVS): ON
Exit tray control
Tray elevation motor (TEM): Reverse rotation.
Exit tray: Moves down.
This status occurs when paper is output onto the exit tray during copying and is accumulated.
Figure 2-1-17 Paper surface on status
4. Lever stored status
Sensor status
Push paper sensor (PPS): OFF
Surface view sensor (SVS): ON
Exit tray control
Tray elevation motor (TEM): Reverse rotation.
Exit tray: Moves down.
This status occurs when paper is accumulated so much, for example at the start of copying,
that the push paper lever cannot be released.
Figure 2-1-18 Lever stored status
Push paper
lever
PPS:ON
SVS:ON
TEM: Reverse rotation
Push paper
lever
PPS:OFF
SVS:ON
TEM: Reverse rotation
5H1
2-1-14
5H1
2-2-1
(1) PWBs
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. Finisher main PWB (FMPWB) ..................... Controls electrical components.
1
5H1
2-2-2
1. Joint switch (JSW) ....................................... Detects the finisher attached to the machine.
2. Reverse cover switch (RCSW) .................... Detects opening/closing of the reverse cover.
3. Upper cover sensor (UCS)........................... Detects opening/closing of the upper cover.
4. Paper entry sensor 1 (PES1) ....................... Detects paper entering the finisher (emitter).
5. Paper entry sensor 2 (PES2) ....................... Detects paper entering the finisher (receiver).
6. Reverse sensor (REVS)............................... Detects a paper misfeed in the reverse section.
7. Paper conveying sensor (PCS).................... Detects a paper misfeed in the processing section.
8. Adjustment home position sensor
(ADHPS) ...................................................... Detects the adjustment plate in the home position.
9. Exit sensor (EXS)......................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the exit section.
10. Bundle discharge unit switch (BDUSW)....... Power supply to the stapler section caused by descent of the bundle dis-
charge unit.
11. Push paper sensor (PPS) ............................ Detects the position of the push paper lever.
12. Surface view sensor (SVS) .......................... Detects the position of the push paper lever.
13. Tray upper limit sensor (TULS) .................... Detects the exit tray reaching the upper limit.
14. Tray lower limit sensor (TLLS) ..................... Detects the exit tray reaching the lower limit.
15. Stapler cover switch (STCSW)..................... Detects opening/closing of the stapler cover.
4
2
7
8
15
11
12
13
14
9
3
10
1
5
6
5H1
2-2-3
(3) Motors
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Reverse motor (RM) .................................... Drives the reverse section.
2. Paper conveying motor (PCM)..................... Drives the processing section.
3. Adjustment motor (ADM) ............................. Drives the adjustment plate.
4. Tray elevation motor (TEM) ......................... Raises and lowers the exit tray.
1
2
3
4
5H1
2-2-4
(4) Solenoids
Figure 2-2-4 Solenoids
1. Separate solenoid (SSOL) ........................... Separates the reverse roller.
2. Flapper solenoid (FSOL).............................. Operates the flapper.
3. Large gear solenoid (LGSOL)...................... Operates the bundle discharge unit.
4. Paddle solenoid (PDSOL)............................ Operates the paddle.
5. Surface view solenoid (SVSOL)................... Operates the push paper lever.
1
4
5
3
2
5H1
2-2-5
(5) Stapler section
Figure 2-2-5 Stapler section
1. Stapler empty sensor (STES) ...................... Detects the presence of staples.
2. Stapler cartridge sensor (STCS) .................. Detects the presence of the stapler cartridge.
3. Stapler home position sensor (STHPS) ....... Detects the stapler in the home position.
4. Stapler self-priming sensor (STSPS) ........... Detects the pre-stapling state of the stapler.
5. Stapler motor (STM)..................................... Drives the stapler.
1
2
3
4
5
5H1
2-2-6
5H1
2-3-1
2-3-1 Finisher main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Finisher main PWB block diagram
JSW
RCSW
REVS
SSOL
FSOL
TULS
TLLS
PES1
PES2
RM
A,B,_A,_B
TEM+,TEM-
Machine
Reverse unit
FMPWB
Tray unit
SDO
SDI
Stapler
STCSW
BDUSW
UCS
PCS
ADHPS
EXS
SVSOL
DET
STCSW
BDUSW
UCS
PCS
ADHPS
EXS
SVS
PPS
SVS
PPS
SVSOL
PDSOL
ADM
A,B,_A,_B
PCM
A,B,_A,_B
PDSOL
LGSOL
LGSOL
ADM
PCM
Reset
DO,DI,
CS,SK
CLK,DI,
LD,AO1-5
JSW
PES1
PES2
REVS
SSOL
RCSW
FSOL
RM
TULS
TLLS
TEM
IC13.3
IC12.4,5
IC14.1
SGND
To stapler
Reset
circuit
IC3
EEPROM
IC4
D/A
converter
IC5
CPU
IC1
Motor
driver
IC6
Motor
driver
IC8
SCLK
READY
IC12.6,IC15.2
IC12.3,IC12.2
IC12.1,IC15.1
IC2.1,IC2.2
SELECT
Motor
driver
IC7
Motor
driver
IC9
5H1
2-3-2
Figure 2-3-2 Finisher main PWB silk-screen diagram
CN1 1 DC+24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
Connected
to the
machine
2 PGND - - Ground
3 DC+5.1V I 5.1 V DC 5.1 V DC power input
CN2 1 SGND - - Ground
Connected
to the
machine
2 SGND - - Ground
3 SGND - - Ground
4 SGND - - Ground
5 SGND - - Ground
6 SGND - - Ground
7 DET O 5/0 V DC Finisher set signal
8 SDO I 5/0 V DC Serial communication signal reception
9 SDI O 5/0 V DC Serial communication signal transmission
10 SCLK I 5/0 V DC Serial clock
11 SELECT I 5/0 V DC Select signal from the machine
12 READY O 5/0 V DC Ready signal to the machine
CN3 1 DC+24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to STCSW/BDUSW
Connected
to the sta-
pler cover
switch and
bundle dis-
charge unit
switch
2 SC_SW I 24/0 V DC STCSW: On/Off
3 SC_SW I 24/0 V DC STCSW: On/Off
4 BDU_SW I 24/0 V DC BDUSW: On/Off
CN1
CN17
1 2
CN13 CN3
CN10 CN9 CN12
C
N
7
C
N
6
C
N
1
1
CN14
CN8 CN15
CN5 CN4
C
N
2
1
2
1
1
1 6 1 4
8 1 6
CN18 1 7
CN16 1 10
1 7
1 4 3 1
11 1
4 1 1 1 3 6
1
9
1
8
6
1
5H1
2-3-3
CN4 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to UCS
Connected
to the upper
cover sen-
sor and
paper con-
veying sen-
sor
2 SGND - - Ground
3 TC_SEN I 5/0 V DC UCS: On/Off
4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PCS
5 SGND - - Ground
6 FEED_SEN I 5/0 V DC PCS: On/Off
CN5 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to ADHPS
Connected
to the
adjustment
home posi-
tion sensor
and exit
sensor
2 SGND - - Ground
3 AHP_SEN I 5/0 V DC ADHPS: On/Off
4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EXS
5 SGND - - Ground
6 EX_SEN I 5/0 V DC EXS: On/Off
7 N.C. - - Not used
CN6 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply to SVSOL
Connected
to the sur-
face view
solenoid,
surface view
sensor and
push paper
sensor
2 SV_SOL_1 O 24/0 V DC SVSOL: On/Off (actuate)
3 SV_SOL_2 O 24/0 V DC SVSOL: On/Off (release)
4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SVS
5 SGND - - Ground
6 SV_SEN I 5/0 V DC SVS: On/Off
7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PPS
8 SGND - - Ground
9 PP_SEN I 5/0 V DC PPS: On/Off
CN7 1 FMOT A O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal
Connected
to the paper
conveying
motor
2 FMOT_A O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal
3 FMOT B O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal
4 FMOT_B O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal
5 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCM
6 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCM
CN8 1 ALM A O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal
Connected
to the
adjustment
motor
2 ALM_A O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal
3 ALM_B O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal
4 ALM B O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal
CN9 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PDSOL
Connected
to the pad-
dle solenoid
2 PD_SOL O 24/0 V DC PDSOL: On/Off
3 N.C. - - Not used
CN10 1 STP_SPS I 5/0 V DC STSPS: On/Off
Connected
to the sta-
pler
2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to stapler
3 SGND - - Ground
4 STP_ULS I 5/0 V DC STLS: On/Off
5 STP_HPS I 5/0 V DC STHPS: On/Off
6 STP_LSS I 5/0 V DC STES: On/Off
7 STP_CS I 5/0 V DC STCS: On/Off
8 MTR+ O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal
9 MTR+ O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal
10 MTR- O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal
11 MTR- O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal
5H1
2-3-4
CN11 1 TEDM+ O 24/0 V DC TEM drive control signal
Connected
to the tray
upper limit
sensor, tray
lower limit
sensor and
tray eleva-
tion motor
2 TEDM- O 24/0 V DC TEM drive control signal
3 T_NF_SEN I 5/0 V DC TLLS: On/Off
4 SGND - - Ground
5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power supply to TLLS
6 T_UL_SEN I 5/0 V DC TULS: On/Off
7 SGND - - Ground
8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TULS
CN12 1 F_SOL O 24/0 V DC FSOL: On/Off
Connected
to the sepa-
rate sole-
noid and
flapper sole-
noid
2 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FSOL
3 S_SOL O 24/0 V DC SSOL: On/Off
4 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to SSOL
CN13 1 DC+24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to JSW
Connected
to the joint
switch and
reverse
cover switch
2 J_SW I 24/0 V DC JSW: On/Off
3 J_PTH - - Ground
4 RC_PTH - - Ground
5 DC+24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RCSW
6 RC_SW I 24/0 V DC RCSW: On/Off
CN14 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PES1
Connected
to the paper
entry sen-
sor 1, 2 and
reverse sen-
sor
2 IN_SEN_H I 5/0 V DC PES1: On/Off
3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PES2
4 IN_SEN_J I 5/0 V DC PES2: On/Off
5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to REVS
6 SGND - - Ground
7 RVS_SEN I 5/0 V DC REVS: On/Off
8 N.C. - - Not used
CN15 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply to RM
Connected
to the
reverse
motor
2 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply to RM
3 RMOT_B O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal
4 RMOT B O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal
5 RMOT_A O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal
6 RMOT A O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal
CN16 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LGSOL
Connected
to the large
gear sole-
noid
2 LG_SOL O 24/0 V DC LGSOL: On/Off
5H1
2-4-1
2
-4
A
p
p
e
n
d
ix
e
s
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
1

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g
,

A
4
/
1
1
"

x

8
1
/
2
"

c
o
p
y

p
a
p
e
r

i
n

t
h
e

s
t
r
a
i
g
h
t

m
o
d
e
0
E
S
W

(
m
a
c
h
i
n
e
)
P
a
p
e
r

e
n
t
r
y

s
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

s
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

e
x
i
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
a
p
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g
s
e
n
s
o
r
E
x
i
t

s
o
n
s
o
r
F
l
a
p
p
e
r

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
S
p
a
r
a
t
e

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

m
o
t
o
r
P
a
p
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g
m
o
t
o
r
A
d
j
u
s
t
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
P
a
d
d
l
e

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
L
a
r
g
e

g
e
a
r

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
S
t
a
p
l
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g

r
o
l
l
e
r
O
N
1
1
7
6
.
4
7
m
s
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
6
0
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
3
0
m
m
/
s
1
7
8
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
6
0
0
m
m
/
s
4
5
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
3
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
1
7
8
m
m
/
s
1
7
6
m
m
/
s
1
2
0
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
2
8
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
1
5
0
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
8
0
m
m
/
s
P
a
p
e
r

f
o
u
n
d
N
o

p
a
p
e
r
P
a
p
e
r

f
o
u
n
d
N
o

p
a
p
e
r
5
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
3
0
0
0
3
5
0
0
4
0
0
0
4
5
0
0
5
0
0
0
5
5
0
0
6
0
0
0
6
5
0
0
(
m
s
e
c
)
5H1
2-4-2
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
2

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g
,

A
4
/
1
1
"

x

8
1
/
2
"

c
o
p
y

p
a
p
e
r

i
n

t
h
e

s
h
i
f
t

m
o
d
e
0
1
1
7
6
.
4
7
m
s
5
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
3
0
0
0
3
5
0
0
4
0
0
0
4
5
0
0
5
0
0
0
5
5
0
0
6
0
0
0
6
5
0
0
(
m
s
e
c
)
E
S
W

(
m
a
c
h
i
n
e
)
P
a
p
e
r

e
n
t
r
y

s
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

s
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

e
x
i
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
a
p
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g
s
e
n
s
o
r
E
x
i
t

s
o
n
s
o
r
F
l
a
p
p
e
r

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
S
p
a
r
a
t
e

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

m
o
t
o
r
P
a
p
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g
m
o
t
o
r
A
d
j
u
s
t
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
P
a
d
d
l
e

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
L
a
r
g
e

g
e
a
r

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
S
t
a
p
l
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g

r
o
l
l
e
r
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
6
0
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
3
0
m
m
/
s
1
7
8
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
6
0
0
m
m
/
s
4
5
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
3
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
1
7
8
m
m
/
s
1
7
6
m
m
/
s
1
2
0
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
2
8
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
1
5
0
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
8
0
m
m
/
s
P
a
p
e
r

f
o
u
n
d
N
o

p
a
p
e
r
P
a
p
e
r

f
o
u
n
d
N
o

p
a
p
e
r
5H1
2-4-3
T
i
m
i
n
g

c
h
a
r
t

N
o
.
3

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g
,

A
4
/
1
1
"

x

8
1
/
2
"

c
o
p
y

p
a
p
e
r

i
n

t
h
e

s
t
a
p
l
i
n
g

m
o
d
e
0
2
2
8
0
m
s
5
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
3
0
0
0
3
5
0
0
4
0
0
0
4
5
0
0
5
0
0
0
5
5
0
0
6
0
0
0
6
5
0
0
7
0
0
0
7
5
0
0
8
0
0
0
8
5
0
0
9
0
0
0
(
m
s
e
c
)
E
S
W

(
m
a
c
h
i
n
e
)
P
a
p
e
r

e
n
t
r
y

s
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

s
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

e
x
i
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
a
p
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g
s
e
n
s
o
r
E
x
i
t

s
o
n
s
o
r
F
l
a
p
p
e
r

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
S
p
a
r
a
t
e

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

m
o
t
o
r
P
a
p
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g
m
o
t
o
r
A
d
j
u
s
t
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
P
a
d
d
l
e

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
L
a
r
g
e

g
e
a
r

s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
S
t
a
p
l
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
c
o
n
v
e
y
i
n
g

r
o
l
l
e
r
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
6
0
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
3
0
m
m
/
s
1
7
8
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
6
0
0
m
m
/
s
4
5
0
m
m
/
s
4
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
3
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
1
7
8
m
m
/
s
1
7
6
m
m
/
s
1
2
0
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
2
8
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
1
5
0
m
m
/
s
0
m
m
/
s
2
0
0
m
m
/
s
2
8
0
m
m
/
s
P
a
p
e
r

f
o
u
n
d
N
o

p
a
p
e
r
P
a
p
e
r

f
o
u
n
d
N
o

p
a
p
e
r
5H1
2-4-4
Part No.
Alternative
part No.
Fig.
No.
Ref.
No.
Push paper sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2
Surface view sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2
Upper cover sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2
Paper conveying sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2
Adjusting hone position sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 4 12
Exit sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 4 12
Tray upper limit sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 5 14
Tray lower limit sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 5 14
Reverse sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 6 52
Exit roller ROL-R-H-OUT 5HL09370 1 41
Paper conveying belt CAT-C 5HL09360 1 55
Paper conveying roller ROL-R-CAT 5HL09640 1 45
Paddle PDL-TH 5HL09430 1 22
Front static eliminator BRUSH-TH-IN 5HL09440 1 14
Rear static eliminator BRUSH-TH-OUT 5HL09470 1 69
Reverse static eliminator BRSH-RV 5HL12320 6 59
Push paper lever cushion CUSION-TM-YO 5HL09660 1 74
5H1
2-4-5
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Exterior Overall exterior cover Cleaning Every time Wipe with dry cloth or cloth
moistened with alcohol.
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Paper con-
veying sec-
tion
sensor
alcohol.
alcohol.
alcohol.
alcohol.
Reverse static
eliminator
Push paper lever
cushion
with alcohol.
5H1
2-4-6
Wiring diagram
C
N

S
.
N
C
C
N

B
.

1
C
N

B
.

2
C
N

B
.

3
C
N

B
.

4
C
N

B
.

5
C
N

B
.

6
C
N

B
.

7
C
N

B
.

8
D
C
+
5
V
S
G
N
D
T

x

D
S
G
N
D
R

x

D
S
G
N
D
N
.
C
.
C
N
C
T
G
Y
Y
W
R
D
O
E
P
K
S
B
B
N
G
Y
Y
W
Y
W
C
N

S
.
C
M
C
N

S
.
N
O
C
N

T
.
N
C
B
E
R
D
B
K
B
K
B
K
C
N

T
.
C
M
C
N

T
.
N
O
C
N

D
.

1
C
N

D
.

2
C
N

D
.

3
U
C
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
C
N
J
J
.
N
O
C
N
J
J
.
C
M
C
N
J
J
.
N
C
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

X
.

1
C
N

X
.

2
C
N

X
.

3
T
U
L
S
S
G
N
D
+
5

V
B
K
B
K
B
K
C
N

Y
.

1
C
N

Y
.

2
C
N

Y
.

3
T
L
L
S
S
G
N
D
+
5

V
B
E
B
E
C
N
H
H
.

1
C
N
H
H
.

2
P
E
S
2
+
5
V
B
E
B
E
C
N

Z
.

2
C
N

Z
.

1
T
E
M
+
T
E
M
-
B
K
B
K
C
N
G
G
.

1
C
N
G
G
.

2
P
E
S
1
+
5
V
B
K
B
K
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

E
.

1
C
N

E
.

2
C
N

E
.

3
P
C
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

F
.

1
C
N

F
.

2
C
N

F
.

3
A
D
H
P
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
B
K
B
K
B
K
C
N

G
.

1
C
N

G
.

2
C
N

G
.

3
C
N

I
.

4
C
N

I
.

3
C
N

I
.

2
C
N

I
.

1
C
N

H
.

1
C
N

H
.

2
C
N

H
.

3
C
N

H
.

4
N
.
C
.
S
V
S
O
L
2
S
V
S
O
L
1
+
2
4
V
C
N
0
0
.

1
C
N
0
0
.

2
C
N
0
0
.

3
C
N
0
0
.

4
C
N
P
P
.

6
C
N
P
P
.

5
C
N
P
P
.

4
C
N
P
P
.

3
+
2
4
V
+
2
4
V
C
N
C
C
.

1
C
N
C
C
.

2
C
N
D
D
.

2
C
N
D
D
.

1
S
S
O
L
+
2
4
V
C
N
A
A
.

1
C
N
A
A
.

2
C
N
B
B
.

2
C
N
B
B
.

1
F
S
O
L
+
2
4
V
R
M
A
R
M
_
A
C
N
0
0
.

5
C
N
0
0
.

6
C
N
P
P
.

2
C
N
P
P
.

1
R
M

B
R
M
_
B
C
N

N
.

4
C
N

N
.

3
C
N

N
.

2
C
N

N
.

1
C
N

M
.

1
C
N

M
.

2
C
N

M
.

3
C
N

M
.

4
A
D
M

B
A
D
M
_
B
A
D
M
A
A
D
M
_
A
C
N

R
.

3
C
N

R
.

2
C
N

R
.

1
C
N

Q
.

1
C
N

Q
.

2
C
N

Q
.

3
L
G
S
O
L
L
G
S
O
L
P
D
S
O
L
A
D
M
P
C
M
P
P
S
S
V
S
S
V
S
O
L
E
X
S
A
D
H
P
S
P
C
S
U
C
S
B
D
U
S
W
S
T
C
S
W
I
/
F
+
2
4
V
N
.
C
.
C
N

P
.

2
C
N

P
.

1
C
N

O
.

1
C
N

O
.

2
P
D
S
O
L
+
2
4
V
E
X
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
B
K
B
K
B
K
Y
W
B
E
R
D
B
K
B
K
B
K
C
N

J
.

1
C
N

J
.

2
C
N

J
.

3
S
V
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
K
C
N

K
.

1
C
N

L
.

1
C
N

L
.

2
C
N

L
.

3
C
N

L
.

4
C
N

L
.

5
C
N

L
.

6
C
N

L
.

7
C
N

L
.

8
C
N

L
.

9
C
N

L
.
1
C
N

L
.
1
1
P
C
M

A
N
.
C
.
+
2
4
V
N
.
C
.
P
C
M
_
A
N
.
C
P
C
M

B
N
.
C
.
+
2
4
V
N
.
C
.
P
C
M
_
B
C
N

K
.

2
C
N

K
.

3
P
P
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N
K
K
.
1
C
N
K
K
.
2
C
N
L
L
.
2
C
N
L
L
.
1
P
E
S
2
P
E
S
1
B
E
B
E
B
K
B
K
W
E
W
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
O
E
R
D
Y
W
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
K
W
E
R
D
Y
W
B
E
O
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
R
D
B
N
Y
W
B
E
O
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
K
B
K
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

C
.

1
C
N

1
.
1
0
C
N

1
.

9
C
N

1
.

8
C
N

1
.

7
C
N

1
.

6
C
N

1
.

5
C
N

1
.

4
C
N

1
.

3
C
N

1
.

2
C
N

1
.

1
D
C
+
2
4
V
D
C
+
2
4
V
D
C
+
2
4
V
D
C
+
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
P
G
N
D
P
G
N
D
P
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
D
C
+
5
V
C
N

C
.

2
C
N

C
.

3
C
N

C
.

4
C
N

C
.

5
C
N

C
.

6
C
N

C
.

8
C
N

C
.

9
P
G
N
D
P
G
N
D
P
G
N
D
P
G
N
D
D
C
+
2
4
V
D
C
+
2
4
V
D
C
+
2
4
V
N
.
C
.
C
N
A
.

1
F
G
N
D
C
N

C
.

7
D
C
+
2
4
V
B
E
R
D
O
E
P
K
S
B
B
N
G
Y
G
N
G
N
B
K
C
N
1
0
.
1
1
C
N
1
0
.
1
0
C
N
1
0
.

9
C
N
1
0
.

8
C
N
1
0
.

7
C
N
1
0
.

6
C
N
1
0
.

4
C
N
1
0
.

1
S
T
M
-
B
K
T
-
P
C
B
F
R
M
-
T
R
Y
S
T
M
-
S
T
M
+
S
T
M
+
S
T
C
S
S
T
E
S
S
T
L
S
S
T
S
P
S
C
N
1
0
.

5
S
T
H
P
S
C
N
1
0
.

3
S
G
N
D
C
N
1
0
.

2
+
5
V
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N
1
1
.

1
C
N
1
1
.

2
C
N
1
1
.

3
C
N
1
1
.

4
C
N
1
1
.

5
C
N
1
1
.

6
C
N
1
1
.

8
T
E
M
+
T
E
M
-
T
L
L
S
S
G
N
D
+
5
V
T
U
L
S
+
5
V
C
N
1
1
.

7
S
G
N
D
B
E
B
E
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N
1
4
.

1
C
N
1
4
.

2
C
N
1
4
.

3
C
N
1
4
.

4
C
N
1
4
.

5
C
N
1
4
.

6
C
N
1
4
.

8
+
5
V
P
E
S
1
+
5
V
P
E
S
2
+
5
V
S
G
N
D
N
.
C
.
C
N
1
4
.

7
R
E
V
S
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
K
B
K
C
N
1
5
.

6
C
N
1
5
.

5
C
N
1
5
.

4
C
N
1
5
.

3
C
N
1
5
.

2
C
N
1
5
.

1
R
M
A
R
M
_
A
R
M

B
R
M
_
B
+
2
4
V
+
2
4
V
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N
1
3
.

1
C
N
1
3
.

2
C
N
1
3
.

3
C
N
1
3
.

4
C
N
1
3
.

5
C
N
1
3
.

6
D
C
+
2
4
V
J
S
W
J
_
P
T
H
R
C
_
P
T
H
D
C
+
2
4
V
R
C
S
W
Y
W
R
D
B
E
B
E
Y
W
R
D
R
D
Y
W
B
E
C
N
1
2
.

4
C
N
1
2
.

3
C
N
1
2
.

2
C
N
1
2
.

1
+
2
4
V
S
S
O
L
+
2
4
V
F
S
O
L
B
E
B
E
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

U
.

1
S
t
a
p
l
e
r
T
r
a
y

u
n
i
t
S
T
M
S
T
C
S
S
T
E
S
S
T
H
P
S
S
T
L
S
S
T
S
P
S
C
N

U
.

2
C
N

U
.

3
C
N

U
.

4
C
N

U
.

5
C
N

U
.

6
C
N

U
.

7
C
N

U
.

8
C
N

U
.

9
C
N

U
.
1
3
S
T
M
-
T
E
M
T
L
L
S
T
U
L
S
F
S
O
L
S
S
O
L
R
E
V
S
P
E
S
2
P
E
S
1
R
M
R
C
S
W
J
S
W
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

u
n
i
t
F
M
P
W
B
S
T
M
-
N
.
C
.
S
T
M
+
S
T
M
+
N
.
C
.
S
T
C
S
S
T
E
S
S
T
H
P
S
S
T
S
P
S
C
N

U
.
1
0
S
T
L
S
C
N

U
.
1
1
S
G
N
D
C
N

U
.
1
2
+
5
V
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
W
E
/
B
K
W
E
W
E
/
R
D
V
T
G
N
W
E
/
B
K
W
E
W
E
/
R
D
G
N
C
N

2
.

5
C
N

2
.

4
C
N

2
.

3
C
N

2
.

2
C
N

2
.

1
T

x

D
S
G
N
D
R

x

D
S
G
N
D
C
N
C
T
V
T
Y
W
G
Y
R
D
C
N

3
.

1
C
N

3
.

2
C
N

3
.

3
C
N

3
.

4
D
C
+
2
4
V
S
T
C
S
W
S
T
C
S
W
B
D
U
S
W
B
E
B
K
B
K
B
K
C
N

4
.

1
C
N

4
.

2
C
N

4
.

3
C
N

4
.

6
+
5
V
S
G
N
D
U
C
S
P
C
S
C
N

4
.

4
+
5
V
C
N

4
.

5
S
G
N
D
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

5
.

1
C
N

5
.

2
C
N

5
.

3
C
N

5
.

7
+
5
V
S
G
N
D
A
D
H
P
S
N
.
C
.
C
N

5
.

4
+
5
V
C
N

5
.

5
S
G
N
D
B
K
B
K
C
N

5
.

6
E
X
S
B
K
B
K
B
N
Y
W
C
N

7
.

1
C
N

7
.

2
C
N

7
.

3
C
N

7
.

6
P
C
M
A
P
C
M
_
A
P
C
M

B
+
2
4
V
C
N

7
.

4
P
C
M
_
B
C
N

7
.

5
+
2
4
V
O
E
R
D
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

8
.

4
C
N

8
.

3
C
N

8
.

2
A
D
M

B
A
D
M
_
B
A
D
M
A
C
N

8
.

1
A
D
M
_
A
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N

9
.

1
C
N

9
.

2
C
N

9
.

3
+
2
4
V
P
D
S
O
L
N
.
C
.
B
K
B
K
C
N
1
7
.

1
C
N
1
7
.

2
+
2
4
V
L
G
S
O
L
B
K
B
K
B
K
C
N

6
.

1
C
N

6
.

2
C
N

6
.

3
C
N

6
.

9
B
K
T
-
B
A
S
E
B
K
T
-
B
A
S
E
B
K
T
-
S
O
L
B
K
T
-
P
C
M
B
E
B
E
B
K
T
-
S
T
S
T
Y
-
R
V
-
D
+
2
4
V
S
V
S
O
L
1
S
V
S
O
L
2
P
P
S
C
N

6
.

4
+
5
V
C
N

6
.

5
S
G
N
D
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
E
B
E
C
N

6
.

6
S
V
S
C
N

6
.

7
+
5
V
C
N

6
.

8
S
G
N
D
B
E
C
N
J
J
.
N
O
C
N
J
J
.
C
M
C
N
J
J
.
N
C
R
D
P
K
:

P
I
N
K
B
N
:

B
R
O
W
N
B
E
:

B
L
U
E
B
K
:

B
L
A
C
K
G
N
:

G
R
E
E
N
G
Y
:

G
R
A
Y
R
D
:

R
E
D
W
E
:

W
H
I
T
E
Y
W
:

Y
E
L
L
O
W
O
E
:

O
R
A
N
G
E
V
T
:

V
I
O
L
E
T
S
B
:

S
K
Y

B
L
U
E
Y
W
B
E
B
E
B
E
B
E
C
N
F
F
.

1
C
N
F
F
.

2
C
N
F
F
.

3
R
E
V
S
S
G
N
D
+
5

V
FaxSystem(N)
3KK
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-4
(1) Main body..........................................................................................................................................1-1-4
(2) Operation panel.................................................................................................................................1-1-5
1-2 Installation
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation......................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure........................................................................................................................1-2-2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad ...............................................................................................................1-2-3
(1) Maintenance mode item list...............................................................................................................1-3-1
1-3-2 System settings.....................................................................................................................................1-3-39
(1) Executing a system setting item......................................................................................................1-3-39
(2) Fax default.......................................................................................................................................1-3-40
(3) Registration .....................................................................................................................................1-3-42
1-4 Error Codes
1-4-1 Error codes .............................................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Error code..........................................................................................................................................1-4-1
(2) Table of general classification...........................................................................................................1-4-2
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B.........................................................................1-4-4
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit .....................................................................1-4-5
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error...................................................................1-4-5
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error ........................................................................1-4-5
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission...............................................................................1-4-6
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception ....................................................................................1-4-8
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ..........................................................................1-4-10
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception................................................................................1-4-10
(2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception.............................................1-4-10
(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission .................................................................1-4-10
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-5-1
1-5-2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................1-5-3
2-2-1 Fax control PWB.....................................................................................................................................2-2-1
2-2-2 NCU PWB...............................................................................................................................................2-2-5
3KK
1-1-1
1-1 Specifications
Type........................................................... Optional Fax Kit
Compatibility .............................................. Group 3
Line Requirement ...................................... Subscription telephone line
Transmission Speed .................................. Within 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T #1 chart)
Modem Speed............................................ 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/
7200/4800/2400 bps
Data Compression..................................... JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ......................................... ECM
Maximum Document Dimensions .............. Width: 11" [297 mm] Length: 63" [1600 mm]
Automatic Document Feeder Capacity ...... Duplex document processor: Max. 100 pages
Auxiliary Scanning Line Density ................ Horizontal x Vertical
Normal (8 dots/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
Fine (8 dots/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)
Super fine (8 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
Ultra fine (16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
Recording Resolution ................................ 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Grayscale................................................... 128 levels (Value differential diffusion)
Speed-Dial Keys ........................................ Max. 1000 destinations
Broadcast Transmission ............................ Max. 300 destinations
Polling Reception....................................... Max. 300 locations
Installed Bitmap Memory ........................... Max. 4 MB (for reading), Max. 4 MB (for writing) (with the addition of optional
memory)
Installed Imaging Memory.......................... 4 MB (Standard), 32 MB (Maximum)
Management Reports and Lists................. Activity Report, Confirmation List, User Setting List, One-Touch Key List, Tele-
phone Directory List, Program Dial List, Group Dial List, Encryption Key List,
Restricted Access Report
Options ...................................................... Memory module DIMM (32 MB)
Functions ................................................... See pages 1-1-2 to 1-1-3.
3KK
1-1-2
Reception functions Manual reception
Automatic reception
Fax/telephone auto selection
TAD reception
D.R.D. reception*1
Remote switching
Transmission functions One-touch dialing*2
Program dialing*2
Group dialing*2
Chain dialing*2
Redialing (manual/automatic)
Dial confirmation
Communication functions Direct feed transmission
Memory transmission
Direct reception
Memory reception (subaddress-based confidential reception and relay broadcast
reception)
Additional communication func-
tions
Broadcast transmission (up to 300 numbers)
Polling communication
Encrypted communication
Password check communication
Memory fax forwarding
Reserved transmission
Timer transmission
Interrupt transmission
Short protocol
ECM
Subaddress transmission
Subaddress-based confidential reception
Subaddress-based bulletin board communication
Subaddress-based relay broadcast
Subaddress-based relay broadcast reception
Supplementary communication
functions
Manual transmission
Telephone directory
Canceling communication
Transmission destination display
Tone transmission
Memory back-up (60 min.*3)
Communication result display
Supplementary transmission func-
tions
Batch transmission
TTI transmission
Bulletin board
Rotation transmission
Duplex transmission*4
Initial communication speed setting
Line type setting
Supplementary reception func-
tions
Memory reception
2-in-1 reception
Auto reduce reception
Rotation reception
Duplex reception
Recording paper setting (auto selection, fixed size or fixed cassette)
Reception date and time recording
Reduced size reception
Bulk fax reception
3KK
1-1-3
*1: For 120 V specifications only.
*2: To be registered under one-touch keys. Up to 1000 one-touch keys can be used for one-touch dialing, program dialing,
group dialing and chain dialing.
*3: When the optional memory module DIMM is installed.
*4: Available only when the duplex document processor is installed.
Reports Activity report
Transmission report
Reception report
Power failure report
Delayed communication report
Confirmation report
User settings list
Encryption key list
Management report
Department list
One-touch key list
Telephone directory list
Program dial list
Group dial list
Subaddress confidential box list
Subaddress relay box list
Encryption box list
Network fax setting list
Others Memory editing
Remote diagnosis
Department control for faxes
Smoothing reception
Fax priority printout
Network fax functions
3KK
1-1-4
1-1-2 Parts names
(1) Main body
Figure 1-1-1
5
6 7
8
9
3
10
2
1
4
2
1. Operation panel
2. Telephone jack (T)
3. Line jack (L)
4. Main power switch
Document Processor
5. Document tray
6. Document insert guides
7. Document Processor cover
8. Document eject table
9. Document Processor open/close lever
10. Document set indicator
3KK
1-1-5
(2) Operation panel
8 0
1
6
2
5
9
7
3
4
10 11
1. Touch panel
2. Numeric keys
3. Start key
4. Fax key/Fax indicator
5. Fax lamp
6. Reset key
7. Stop/Clear key
8. Print Management key
9. System Menu/Counter key
10. Interrupt key/indicator lamp
11. Power key
3KK
1-1-6
Figure 1-1-2
The fax system consists of the fax control PWB (FCPWB), NCU PWB (NCUPWB), speaker (SP), backup battery (BUBAT)
and optional memory module DIMM.
L
I
N
E
T
E
L
1
YC19
YC6
YC1
YC2
YC2
2
1
NCUPWB
FCPWB
MPWB
OPWB-L
OPWB-R
FRYPWB
YC7
YC7
1
2
YC25
YC3
YC1
YC1
Touch panel
LCD
1
YC4
YC2
1
2
3
4
YC5
YC4
YC3
CN1
CN2
BUBAT
2
1
BTT+
GND(P)
SP
CN1
3
1
2
PSPWB
3KK
1-2-1
1-2 Installation
onto the machine.
3KK
1-2-2
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
1. Fax control assembly

2. Cover pad
3. Antistatic air-padded bag
4. Harness
5. Modular cord (100V, 120
V specifications)
6. Plastic bag
7. M4 x 8-tap-tight S screws
8. Plastic bag
9. FCC68 label (120 V
specifications only)
10. Alphabet label
11. CD-ROM
13. Plastic bag
14. Upper pad
15. Pad
16. Operation guide (120 V
specifications only)
17. Plastic bag (120 V speci-
fications only)
18. Outer case
19. Barcode labels
3KK
1-2-3
(2) Remove the tapes and pad
When installing the machine, be sure to remove the following tapes and pad.
1. Remove the tape and then remove the
cover pad.
Figure 1-2-2
Cover pad
Tape
3KK
1-2-4
Initialization procedure after installation of facsimile system
1. Insert the machine power plug to the wall
outlet and turn the main power switch on.
2. Run maintenance item U601.
3. Enter a destination code using the numeric
keys (refer to the destination code list) and
then press the start key.
Enter a destination code with three digits.
4. Enter the OEM code (000) and then press
the start key.
5. Confirm that the display is changed as
shown in the figure.
The version number of the software is dis-
played.
6. Press the cursor down key to change the
display to maintenance item U602.
Figure 1-2-3
7. Press the start key and confirm that the dis-
play is changed as shown in the figure.
The version number of the software is dis-
played.
8. After completing the installation, run a com-
munications test to confirm that the fax sys-
tem is working correctly.
Figure 1-2-4
Code Destination Code Destination Code Destination
000 Japan 159 South Africa 253 Sweden
009 Australia 169 Thailand France
080 Hong Kong 181 U.S.A. Austria
084 Indonesia 242 South America Switzerland
088 Israel 243 Saudi Arabia Belgium
108 Malaysia 253 CTR21 (European nations) Denmark
126 New Zealand Italy Finland
136 Peru Germany Portugal
137 Philippines Spain Ireland
152 Middle East U.K. Norway
156 Singapore Netherlands 254 Taiwan
INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED
***************
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED
***************
3KK
1-3-1
(1) Maintenance mode item list
Section
Item
No.
Content of maintenance item Initial setting*
Fax U600 Initializing all data -
U601 Initializing permanent data -
U602 Setting factory defaults -
U603 Setting the user registration data
Setting the self telephone number
Setting the type of telephone line
Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select mode
Setting remote diagnostic transmission
-
-
-
-
U604 Clearing data
Clearing transmission history
Initializing the subaddress confidential box ID
Initializes the subaddress relay box ID
Initializes the encription box ID
-
-
-
-
U605 Setting the system (operational)
Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory
transmission
Setting an alarm for when reception is completed
Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be per-
formed
Setting the addition of an image to the report
Setting the error report display format
Setting the line-monitoring period
Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching
Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching
Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)
Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off
Setting the date format
Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized
Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized
Setting whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the
list
-
-
-
-
-
U607 Setting the system (communication 1)
Setting the auto redialing interval
Setting the communication starting speed
Setting the reception speed
Setting the mode for remote switching
Setting the transmission intervals
Setting the loop current detection before dialing
Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
U608 Setting transmission
Setting the method to process errors
Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception
Setting the reference for RTN signal output
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver
Setting ECM transmission
Setting ECM reception
Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1
Setting the frequency of the CED signal
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3KK
1-3-2
Fax U609 Setting communication time
Setting the T0 time-out time
Setting the Ta time-out time
Setting the Tb1 time-out time
Setting the Tc time-out time
Setting the Td time-out time
-
-
69
30
20
80
60
-
U610 Setting the modem output level
Setting the modem output level
Adjusting the modem output level
-
-
U611 G3 cable equalizer
Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer
Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer
-
-
U612 Setting the modem detection level -
U613 Setting the DTMF output level
Setting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level
Setting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level
-
-
U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level
Adjusting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level
Adjusting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level
-
-
U615 Setting the NCU
Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN
Setting PSTN dial tone detection
Setting busy tone detection
Setting for a PBX
-
-
-
-
U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses
Make time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS)
Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS)
-
-
U617 Outputting lists
Settings list
Action list
Own-status report
Protocol list
One-touch dialing ECM setting list
-
-
-
-
-
U650 Setting the system 1
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at
100% magnification
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in
the auto reduction mode
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax
(A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode
Setting the recording width for inch specifications
Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list
3
0
0
-
-
U651 Setting the system 2
Setting the variations range in rotation reception
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction
when A4 paper is set
when letter size paper is set
3
7
22
26
Section
Item
No.
3KK
1-3-3
Fax U660 Setting the system (communication 2)
Setting the short protocol transmission
Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission
Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select
mode
Setting ECM for each one-touch key
-
-
-
-
-
U670 Setting the system (communication 3)
Enabling/disabling V.34 communication
Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz)
-
-
-
-
-
U680 Displaying the fax board ROM version -
U882 Setting the software switches -
U894 Performing board test
Performing test on DRAM
Performing test on optional memory
-
-
Others U917 Setting backup data reading/writing -
U926 Rewriting FAX program -
Section
Item
No.
3KK
1-3-4
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U600
Initializing all data
Description
Initializes software switches and all data in the backup data on the fax control PWB, according to the destina-
tion and OEM.
Executes the check of the file system, when abnormality of the file system is detected, initializes the file sys-
tem, communication past record and register setting contents.
Purpose
To initialize the fax control PWB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.
Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the
destination code).
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.
4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is
displayed two seconds later.
Destination code list
INI. ALL DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
INI. ALL DATA
OEM CODE:000
INI. ALL DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. ALL DATA
COMPLETED
***************
Code Destination Code Destination Code Destination
000 Japan 159 South Africa 253 Sweden
009 Australia 169 Thailand France
080 Hong Kong 181 U.S.A. Austria
084 Indonesia 242 South America Switzerland
088 Israel 243 Saudi Arabia Belgium
108 Malaysia 253 CTR21 (European nations) Denmark
126 New Zealand Italy Finland
136 Peru Germany Portugal
137 Philippines Spain Ireland
152 Middle East U.K. Norway
156 Singapore Netherlands 254 Taiwan
3KK
1-3-5
U601
Initializing permanent data
Description
Initializes software switches other than that for machine data on the fax control PWB according to the destina-
tion and OEM.
Purpose
To initialize the fax control PWB without changing user registration data and factory settings.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.
Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the
destination code).
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
U602
Setting factory defaults
Description
Initializes software switches other than that for machine data and the backup data on the fax control PWB,
according to the destination and OEM.
Purpose
To initialize the fax control PWB to the factory default.
Method
Maintenance
item No.
Description
INI. KEEP DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
INI. KEEP DATA
OEM CODE:000
INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED
***************
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED
***************
3KK
1-3-6
U603
Setting the user registration data
Description
Makes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax.
Purpose
To be run after installation of the facsimile kit if necessary.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the self telephone number
1. Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.
Up to 20 digits can be entered.
To correct the entered telephone number or to delete the stored telephone number, reset by pressing
the stop/clear key.
The item-selection screen does not reappear until registration or deletion processing is completed.
Setting the type of telephone line
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select mode
Use this if the user wishes to adjust the number of rings that occur before the unit switches into fax receiving
mode when fax/telephone auto-select is enabled.
If you set this to 0, the unit will start fax reception without any ringing.
Setting remote diagnostic transmission
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to select if remote diagnostic transmission is to be enabled.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
SELF TEL NO. Sets the self telephone number.
LINE TYPE Sets the type of telephone line.
RINGS (F/T) # Sets the number of rings in fax/telephone auto select mode.
REMOTE DIAG Sets remote diagnostic transmission.
Display Description
1:DTMF DTMF
2:10 10 PPS
3:20 20 PPS
Description Setting range
Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15
Display Description
1: ON Remote diagnostic transmission is enabled.
2: OFF Remote diagnostic transmission is disabled.
3KK
1-3-7
U604
Clearing data
Description
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history and IDs.
Purpose
To clear the transmission history or if an ID has been forgotten.
Method
2. Select the item to be initialized.
Initialization processing starts. When processing is finished, the screen displays [COMPLETED].
Completion
is displayed.
U605
Setting the system (operational)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding operation.
Start
Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmission
To select whether to send only stored data or to display an error indication and cancel transmission if memory
becomes full during memory transmission.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
COMM. REC Clears the activity report, error list, action list, transmission history of
each department as listed on the department control report, transmis-
sion history for displaying the transmission results, document num-
ber, timer program information, protocol list, and other transmission
history such as image data, excluding items regarding the machine
variation adjustment.
F-CONFI ID Initializes the subaddress confidential box ID.
F-RELY ID Initializes the subaddress relay box ID.
ENCRPT ID Initializes the encription box ID.
Display Description
MEM. FULL Sets how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory trans-
mission.
FIN. ALARM Sets an alarm for when reception is completed.
AUTO REDU Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed.
ADD IMAGE Sets for the addition of an image to the report.
ERR. CODE Sets the error report display format.
MONITOR Sets the line-monitoring period.
TIME (ONE) Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching.
TIME (CON) Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching.
RESOLUT Sets the initial condition of fax image scanning quality.
Display Description
1: CONT Whether to continue memory transmission or to clear the memory can
be selected by the user.
2: STOP Memory is forcibly cleared.
3KK
1-3-8
U605
Setting an alarm for when reception is completed
Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed
Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100%
magnification.
Setting the addition of an image to the report
Selects if an image is to be added to the transmission report.
Setting the error report display format
Selects the format of the transmission report when a transmission error occurs.
Setting the line-monitoring period
Sets the period to monitor the line. By monitoring a transmission from the start to the end, it can be checked
whether the transmission was correct or not.
Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be dis-
played, but the setting made is ineffective.)
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: ON An alarm rings.
2: OFF An alarm does not ring.
Display Description
1: ON Auto reduction is performed if the received document is longer than the fax paper.
2: OFF Auto reduction is not performed.
Display Description
1: ON Image added.
2: OFF Image not added.
Display Description
1: WORDS Records an error message (BUSY, OK, ERROR or STOP).
2: CODE Records a six-digit error code.
3: MIX Records either an error message or code.
Display Description
1: END Until transmission is completed.
2: DIS After dialing is completed until reception of a DIS signal.
One-shot detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 (x 5 : ms)
3KK
1-3-9
U605
Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be
displayed, but the setting made is ineffective.)
Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality
Set to the resolution that is most frequently used by the user.
Completion
is displayed.
U606
Setting the system (operation unit and display)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the operation unit and display.
Start
Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Continuous detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 (x 5 : ms)
Display Description
1: S Standard
2: F Fine
3: SF Super fine
4: UF Ultra fine
Display Description
ALARM LED OFF Sets the conditions under which an error indicator turns off.
DATE PATTERN Sets the date format.
RESO. LOCK Sets if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized.
DENS. LOCK Sets if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized.
REPORT SKIP Sets whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the list.
Display Description
1: RESET An error indicator turns off only when the reset key is pressed.
2: COMM An error indicator turns off when any key is pressed, an original is
inserted or the next transmission is started.
3KK
1-3-10
U606
(cont.)
Setting the date format
Selects the date format on the respective reports and sender's information record.
Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized
Sets if the resolution is to be initialized when fax operation is complete.
Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized
Sets if the scanning density is initialized when fax operation is complete.
Setting whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the list
Sets whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the list.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: YMD Year/month/day
2: MDY Month/day/year
3: DMY Day/month/year
Display Description
1: ON Resolution is initialized.
2: OFF Resolution is not initialized.
Display Description
1: ON Density is initialized.
2: OFF Density is not initialized.
Display Description
1: ON Unregistered numbers are skipped.
2: OFF Unregistered numbers are not skipped.
3KK
1-3-11
U607
Setting the system (communication 1)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.
Start
Setting the auto redialing interval
Change the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is not possible due to too short redial
interval, or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval.
Setting the communication starting speed
Sets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When the destination unit has V.34 capabil-
ity, V.34 is selected for transmission, regardless of this setting.
Setting the reception speed
Sets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal. When the destination unit
has V.34 capability, V.34 is selected, regardless of the setting.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
INTERVAL Sets the auto redialing interval.
TX SPEED Sets the communication starting speed.
RX SPEED Sets the reception speed.
REMOTE Sets the mode for remote switching.
CALL INT Sets the transmission intervals.
DC LOOP Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
DIS 4BYTE Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Redialing interval 1 to 9 (min.)
Display Description
1: 144 V.17, 14400 bps
2: 96 V.17, 9600 bps
3: 48 V.27ter, 4800 bps
4: 24 V.27ter, 2400 bps
Display Description
1: 144 V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
2: 96 V.29, V.27ter
3: 48 V.27ter
4: 24 V.27ter (fallback only)
3KK
1-3-12
U607
(cont.)
Setting the mode for remote switching
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change the setting according to the type of
telephone connected to the machine.
Setting the transmission intervals
Sets the minimum time required for connection to the line for the next transmission after the previous trans-
mission was completed. Change the setting if transmission problems occur during multi-transmission, such as
broadcasting and polling transmission, or reserved transmission.
Setting the loop current detection before dialing
Sets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing.
Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes
Sets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: ONE One-shot detection
2: CONT Continuous detection
Display Description
1: 10 10 s
2: 30 30 s
3: 70 70 s
4: 120 120 s
Display Description
1: ON Performs loop current detection before dialing.
2: OFF Does not perform loop current detection before dialing.
Display Description
1: ON Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
2: OFF Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
3KK
1-3-13
U608
Setting transmission
Description
Makes settings regarding fax transmission.
Start
Setting the method to process errors
Selects if transmission is to be treated as an error if an RTN or PIN signal is received. If it is treated as an
error, an alarm sounds and a transmission report is output.
Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception
Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used as one of the correction measures
for transmission errors and other problems.
Setting the reference for RTN signal output
Sets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to
the quality of the line, they can be reduced by lowering this setting.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
ERROR Sets the method to process errors.
DIS-2 RES Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN CHECK Sets the reference for RTN signal output.
TX ECHO Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX ECHO Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver.
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.
ECM RX Sets ECM reception.
TCF CHECK Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1.
CED FREQ. Sets the frequency of the CED signal.
Display Description
1: OK Transmission is not treated as an error.
2: ERROR Transmission is treated as an error.
Display Description
1: ONCE Responds to the first signal.
2: TWICE Responds to the second signal.
Display Description
1: 5 Error line rate of 5%
3KK
1-3-14
U608
(cont.)
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender
Sets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received. Used when problems occur due to
echoes at the sender.
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver
Sets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received.
Used when problems occur due to echoes at the receiver.
Setting ECM transmission
To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Setting ECM reception
To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measure
to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: 500 Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
2: 300 Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Display Description
1: 500 Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED.
2: 75 Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED.
Display Description
1: ON ECM transmission is enabled.
2: OFF ECM transmission is disabled.
Display Description
1: ON ECM reception is enabled.
2: OFF ECM reception is disabled.
Number of allowed error bytes when detecting TCF 0 to 255
3KK
1-3-15
U608
(cont.)
Setting the frequency of the CED signal
Sets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to improve transmission performance for
international communications.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the frequency.
Completion
is displayed.
U609
Setting communication time
Description
Sets the time-out time for fax transmission.
Purpose
Used mainly to improve transmission performance for international communications.
Start
Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit,
a line can be disconnected. Change the setting to prevent this problem.
Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. No change is necessary for this mainte-
nance item.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: 2100 2100 Hz
2: 1100 1100 Hz
Display Description
T0 Sets the T0 time-out time.
Ta Sets the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc Sets the Tc time-out time.
Td Sets the Td time-out time.
T0 time-out time 30 to 90 s
T1 time-out time 30 to 90 s
3KK
1-3-16
U609
(cont.)
The T2 time-out time decides the following.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
Setting the Ta time-out time
In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connected
telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). A fax signal is received within the Ta set
time, or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode,
change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Figure 1-3-1 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time
In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as
a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is
unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start ringing an operator through the connected tele-
phone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In the fax/telephone auto select mode,
change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description Setting range Default setting Change in value per step
T2 time-out time 1 to 255 69 100 ms
Description Setting range Change in value per step
Ta time-out time 1 to 255 30
Ta
Tb2
Tb1
R
i
n
g

d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
L
i
n
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

a
s

a

f
a
x

m
a
c
h
i
n
e
R
i
n
g
s
R
i
n
g

b
a
c
k

t
o
n
e

s
e
n
d

s
t
a
r
t
S
t
a
r
t

o
f

f
a
x

r
e
c
e
p
t
i
o
n
Tb1 time-out time 1 to 255 20 100 ms
Tb2 time-out time 1 to 255 80 100 ms
3KK
1-3-17
U609
(cont.)
Setting the Tc time-out time
In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connected
telephone receives a call. Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Setting the Td time-out time
Sets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of the triggers for Tc time check. In the
TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be
sure not to set it too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a tele-
phone.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description Setting range Change in value per step
Tc time-out time 1 to 255 s 60
Td time-out time 1 to 255 s
3KK
1-3-18
U610
Description
Sets the modem output level.
Start
To be set when installing the machine in order to adapt to the line characteristics.
Adjusting the modem output level
No change is necessary from the factory default.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
SGL LEVEL MODEM Sets the modem output level.
SGL OUTPUT ADJ Adjusts the modem output level.
Modem output level 0 to 15
Setting Output level
12 1.0 dBm
11 0.75 dBm
10 0.5 dBm
9 0.25 dBm
8 0 dBm
7 -0.25 dBm
6 -0.5 dBm
5 -0.75 dBm
4 -1.0 dBm
3KK
1-3-19
U611
G3 cable equalizer
Description
Sets the G3 cable equalizer.
Start
Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer
Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics.
Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer
Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics.
Completion
is displayed.
U612
Setting the modem detection level
Description
Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
To improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
REG. G3 TX EQR Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
REG. G3 RX EQR Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
Display Description
1: 0 0 km
2: 18 1.8 km
3: 36 3.6 km
4: 72 7.2 km
Display Description
1: 0 0 km
2: 18 1.8 km
3: 36 3.6 km
4: 72 7.2 km
Display Description
1: 33 -33 dBm
2: 38 -38 dBm
3: 43 -43 dBm
4: 47 -47 dBm
3KK
1-3-20
U613
Setting the DTMF output level
Description
Sets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.
Purpose
Used if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial telephone.
Start
Setting
E.g.: When set to 8, the DTMF output level is -8 dBm.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
DTMF TX LEVEL (H) Sets the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.
DTMF TX LEVEL (L) Sets the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.
DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level 0 to 255
3KK
1-3-21
U614
Adjusting the DTMF output level
Description
Adjusts the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.
Purpose
No change is necessary from the factory default.
Start
Setting
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
SGL LVL DTMF (H) Adjusts the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.
SGL LVL DTMF (L) Adjusts the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.
Setting DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level
12 2.0 dBm
11 1.5 dBm
10 1.0 dBm
9 0.5 dBm
8 0 dBm
7 -0.5 dBm
6 -1.0 dBm
5 -1.5 dBm
4 -2.0 dBm
3KK
1-3-22
U615
Setting the NCU
Description
Makes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU).
Purpose
To be set when installing the facsimile kit.
Start
Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN
Selects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Setting PSTN dial tone detection
Selects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public
switched telephone network.
Setting busy tone detection
When a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or
the busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time.
Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set to 2, this problem may be prevented.
However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
EXCHANGE Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN.
DIAL TONE Sets PSTN dial tone detection.
BUSY TONE Sets busy tone detection.
PBX SETTING Setting for a PBX.
Display Description
1: PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
2: PBX Connected to a PBX.
Display Description
1: ON Detects the dial tone.
2: OFF Does not detect the dial tone.
Display Description
1: ON Detects busy tone.
2: OFF Does not detect busy tone.
3KK
1-3-23
U615
Setting for a PBX
Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Completion
is displayed.
U616
Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses
Description
Adjusts the ratio of make-to-break (ratio of make in pulse cycles) of dial pulses.
Purpose
Change the setting if dial pulse transmission problems occur. Note that 20 PPS is for Japanese specifications
only and no setting is necessary for other specifications.
Start
Setting
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: EARTH Earth mode
2: FLS Flashing mode
3: LOOP Code number mode
Display Description
MAKE TIME (10 PPS) Make time (10 PPS)
MAKE TIME (20 PPS) Make time (20 PPS)
Make time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS) 1 to 99 (ms)
Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS) 1 to 49 (ms)
3KK
1-3-24
U617
Outputting lists
Description
Outputs a list of data regarding fax.
Purpose
To check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the fax.
Method
2. Select the item to be output.
The selected list is output.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
SETTING Outputs a list of software switches, self telephone number, confiden-
tial boxes, ROM versions and other information.
ACTION Outputs a list of error history, transmission line details and other infor-
mation.
SELF ST Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode (own-status report)
regarding fax only.
PROTOCOL Outputs a list of transmission procedures.
1-T. ECM Outputs a list of ECM settings for one-touch dialing.
3KK
1-3-25
U650
Setting the system 1
Description
Makes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automatic print-
ing of the protocol list.
Start
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines
are ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page.
Increase the setting if a blank second page is received, and decrease it if the received image does not
include the entire transmitted data.
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those
lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on
the same page.
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge
margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
CUT LINE (100%) Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
CUT LINE (AUTO) Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the
auto reduction mode.
CUT LINE (A4) Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, let-
ter) in the auto reduction mode.
RX WIDTH 11" Sets the recording width for inch specifications.
PROTOCOL PRT Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list.
Description Setting range Default setting Change in value
per step
Number of lines to be ignored
when receiving at 100%
0 to 22 3 16 lines
per step
Number of lines to be ignored
when receiving in the auto reduction mode
0 to 22 0 16 lines
3KK
1-3-26
U650
(cont.)
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or letter-size paper under the conditions
below.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on
a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
With A4R present and folio absent in the drawers
With letter-size paper present and legal-size paper absent in the drawers
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge
margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.
Setting the recording width for inch specifications
Sets the maximum recording width and processing method when 11" width fax paper is loaded on an inch
specification machine.
Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list
Sets if the protocol list is automatically printed out.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
per step
Number of lines to be ignored when receiv-
ing a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction
mode
0 to 22 0 16 lines
Display Description
1: 11 x 17 Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as A3 width and
records at 100% magnifications.
2: B4 Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as B4 width.
Display Description
1: OFF The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
2: ERROR The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication only
if a communication error occurs.
3: ON The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication.
3KK
1-3-27
U651
Setting the system 2
Description
Sets the variation range in rotation reception and the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Start
Setting the variations range in rotation reception
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored when the received data exceeds the acceptable number of
lines in the rotation reception mode. If the number of excessive lines is smaller than the set value, those lines
are ignored and rotation reception is performed; if it is larger than the set value, rotation reception is not per-
formed.
Even if rotation reception fails, it can be enabled by increasing this value, however, some parts of the
received image may not be printed.
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
ROTAT. RX ERR Sets the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction for rotation
reception.
ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES (A4) Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4
paper is set.
ADJ LINES (LT) Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when let-
ter size paper is set.
Description Setting range Default setting
Number of variation lines in the auxiliary scanning direction 0 to 255 3
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 0 to 22 7
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction
when A4 paper is set
0 to 22 22
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionwhen letter 0 to 22 7
3KK
1-3-28
U660
Description
Purpose
To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.
Start
Sets the signal checking time as a criterion for a received TCF signal.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.
Setting the short protocol transmission
Sets if short protocol transmission is performed.
Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission
Selects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol.
If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device is attached to the machine, commu-
nication problems, including auto switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignore short pro-
tocol transmission to prevent such problems.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
TCF CHECK 2 Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2.
SHORT PRTCOL. TX Sets the short protocol transmission.
SHORT PRTCOL. RX Sets the reception of short protocol transmission.
NUMBER of CNG (F/T) Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.
1TOUCH ECM Turns ECM for one-touch dialing on/off.
Display Description
1: LONG Checks for 1.0 s.
2: SHORT Checks for 0.8 s.
Display Description
1: ON Short protocol transmission is performed.
2: OFF Short protocol transmission is not performed.
Display Description
1: ON Receives short protocol transmission.
2: OFF Ignores short protocol transmission.
3KK
1-3-29
U660
(cont.)
Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode
Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.
Setting ECM for each one-touch key
Turns ECM on/off for each one-touch key.
1. Enter a registered two-digit one-touch key number and press the start key.
3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for entering a one-touch key number is displayed.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key at the screen for entering a one-
touch key number.
Completion
is displayed.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
1: 1 TIME Detects CNG once.
2: 2 TIMES Detects CNG twice.
Display Description
1: ON ECM communication is performed for all one-touch keys.
2: OFF Disables the ECM for one-touch keys.
3KK
1-3-30
U670
Description
Purpose
To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.
Start
Enabling/disabling V.34 communication
Sets whether V.34 communication is enabled/disabled for transmission and reception.
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
V.34 MODEM Enables or disables V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
Display Description
1: ON V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
2: TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
3: RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
4: OFF V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Display Description
1: ON V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
2: OFF V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
Display Description
Display Description
3KK
1-3-31
U670
(cont.)
Completion
Press the stop clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U680
Displaying the fax board ROM version
Description
Displays the version of the ROM on the fax control PWB.
Purpose
To check the version of the ROM on the fax control PWB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The version of the ROM on the fax control PWB is displayed.
Completion
U882 Setting the software switches
Description
Sets the software switches on the fax control PWB individually.
Purpose
Use to change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs. Since the commu-
nication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method
2. Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Use numeric keys 7 to 0 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.
4. Press the start key to set the value.
Completion
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
3KK
1-3-32
U882
(cont.)
List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed
<System setting>
<Machine default>
<Communication setting>
Maintenance
item No.
Description
No. Bit Item
10 0 One-touch name and telephone number display on the destination check screen
14 5 Communication end buzzer after reception
16 1 Ringer frequency detection method
17 0 Top-bottom inversion in duplex reception
19 7 F code check in NW-FAX reception
6 Transfer of polling-received originals to PC
5 Resolution in TIFF files
4 Specifying phone number to a PC file name
22 3 Automatic protocol list output at busy time
23 6 Output of activity reports on condition
21 Debug information report output format
24 5 Recovery of transmission mode after end of fax operation
3 Prohibition of split of standard size
21 Declaration of reception size in automatic paper source selection for fax
0 Declaration of reception size in setting declaration based on the status of cassettes
33 76543210 Number of adjustment lines in PDF files
No. Bit Item
66 765 Selection of scanning density
67 654 Selection of reception mode
No. Bit Item
90 0 TAD reception connection
91 0 Prohibiting manual fax reception
3KK
1-3-33
U882
(cont.)
<Communication control procedure>
<Communication time setting>
Maintenance
item No.
Description
No. Bit Item
101 2 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 17)
1 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 29)
0 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 27ter)
106 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
107 5 33600 bps/V34
4 31200 bps/V34
3 28800 bps/V34
2 26400 bps/V34
1 24000 bps/V34
0 21600 bps/V34
108 7 19200 bps/V34
6 16800 bps/V34
5 14400 bps/V34
4 12000 bps/V34
3 9600 bps/V34
2 7200 bps/V34
1 4800 bps/V34
0 2400 bps/V34
111 3 FSK detection in V.8
112 6 CNG transmission stop condition
2 FIF length in transmission of more than 4 times of DIS/DTC signal
0 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 33)
113 76543210 Adjustment width in automatic reception level adjustment
No. Bit Item
123 76543210 T3 timeout setting
124 76543210 T4 timeout setting (automatic equipment)
125 76543210 T5 timeout setting
130 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
133 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual equipment)
134 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
136 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
137 76543210 Timeout 2 in countermeasures against echo
138 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
3KK
1-3-34
U882
(cont.)
<Modem setting>
<NCU setting>
<Calling time setting>
<Experimental modem setting>
Maintenance
item No.
Description
No. Bit Item
155 76543210 RTH offset (lower byte)
156 76543210 RTH offset (upper byte)
No. Bit Item
161 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
162 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in automatic FAX/TEL switching
165 76543210 Access code registration for connection to PSTN
166 7654 FAX/TEL automatic switching ringback tone ON/OFF cycle
167 10 Pseudo-ringer duty ratio
No. Bit Item
174 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
175 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
182 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
183 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
184 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
185 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
186 76543210 Ringer OFF non-detection time
188 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
189 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
192 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit
195 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
No. Bit Item
596 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH L) lower part
597 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH L) upper part
598 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH U) lower part
599 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH U) upper part
3KK
1-3-35
U894
Performing board test
Description
Performs tests on the DRAM (image memory, bitmap memory) and optional memory on the fax control PWB.
Purpose
To check if reading and writing are performed correctly in respective installed memories.
Start
The test executes.
Performing test on DRAM
1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.
When the test result is OK:
If the test result is NG:
********: address
IMG: DRAM (image memory) error
B.M: DRAM (bitmap memory) error
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Performing test on optional memory
1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.
When the test result is OK:
XXMB: Capacity of the option memory which is installed
If the test result is NG:
********: address
If the test result is NG (memory is not installed):
If the test result is NG (memory which does not have compatibility is installed):
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
BOARD MEMORY Performs tests on SRAM and DRAM.
BOARD OP. MEM Performs tests on optional memory.
TEST MEMORY
OK
TEST MEMORY
NG IMG 0x********
TEST OPTION MEMORY
OK XXMB
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG XXMB 0x********
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG
TEST OPTION MEMORY
INVALID MEMORY-TYPE
3KK
1-3-36
U894
(cont.)
Completion
If the test result is OK, press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
If the test result is NG, reset by turning the main power switch off and on.
U917
Setting backup data reading/writing
Description
Stores backup data from the fax control PWB into CompactFlash or reads the data from CompactFlash.
Purpose
To store and write data when replacing the PWB.
Setting
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone off, switch
off the main power switch.
Disconnect the power plug.
2. Open the interface cover.
3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine.
4. Connect the power plug and turn the main power switch on.
5. Enter the maintenance item.
7. Select the item.
8. Press the start key. Reading or writing is executed, and the screen displays the result.
If the operation was successful:
EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ****
CODE 0000
If the operation failed:
EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ****
CODE XXXX
Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.
See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on P.1-3-37.
10. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Display Description
SRAM -> CF : FAX BACKUP Writing the backup data of fax control PWB
CF -> SRAM : FAX BACKUP Reading the backup data of fax control PWB
SRAM -> CF : FAX DIAL INFO Writing the backup data of fax dial information
CF -> SRAM : FAX DIAL INFO Reading the backup data of fax dial information
3KK
1-3-37
U917
(cont.)
Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Code Description
0102 Detects call for service on fax control PWB.
0103 Detects call for service on engine PWB.
0104 Communication error.
0105 Detects call for service on main PWB.
01FF CF error.
0202 No CF card.
0203 No data in CF card.
0204 CF data is incompatible.
0205 Bad CF data (Checksum error)
0206 CF read error.
0207 CF write error.
0212 Fax control PWB flash memory error.
3KK
1-3-38
U926
Rewriting FAX program
Description
Downloads the fax program and fax fonts.
Purpose
To run when upgrading the fax program and fax fonts.
Setting
2. Open the interface cover.
3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine.
4. Connect the power plug and turn the main power switch on.
5. Enter the maintenance item.
7. Select FAX PROGRAM/FONT. Check that EXECUTE is displayed and then press the start key.
Downloading of the fax program starts and the result shown below is displayed.
EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ****
CODE 0000
EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ****
CODE XXXX
8. Then, downloading of the fax fonts starts and the result shown below is displayed.
EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ****
CODE 0000
EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ****
CODE XXXX
See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on P.1-3-37.
10. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.
Maintenance
item No.
Description
3KK
1-3-39
1-3-2 System settings
In addition to a maintenance function, the machine is equipped with a system settings which can be operated by users
(mainly by the machine administrator). In this machine system settings, default settings can be changed.
(1) Executing a system setting item
Press System Menu/Counter key.
Press [FAX Default].
Start
Execute the fax default setting item
(P.1-3-40).
Fax default setting
End
Press [Close].
Press Reset key.
Press Fax key.
Select [Register] screen.
Start
Registration (P.1-3-42)
Resistration
End
3KK
1-3-40
(2) Fax default
Line Type setting (Inch version only)
Set the type of phone line here to correspond to the type
of telephone service.
1. Select [Line Type] using the cursor up/down keys
and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Tone Line (DTMF)] or [Pulse Line
(10PPS)].
TTI setting
Select whether or not that TTI information will be sent to
the receiving party's fax, and whether it will be printed
inside or outside the border of the transmitted page.
1. Select [TTI] using the cursor up/down keys and
press [Change #].
2. Press either [Outside page], [Inside page] or [Not
Printed].
Print Report setting
1. Select [Print Report] using the cursor up/down keys
2. Activity Report: Press either [On] or [Off].
Transmission Report: Press either [On], [Output on
condition] or [Off].
Reception Report: Press either [On], [Output on
condition] or [Off].
Delayed Communication Report: Press either [On]
or [Off].
Restricted Access Report: Press either [On] or
[Off].
NW-FAX Transmission Report: Press either [On],
[Output on condition] or [Off].
Turning TX/RX Restriction ON/OFF
You can select to only allow fax transmission to those
destinations that are registered in your address book and
those registered as Permit Fax Numbers. You can also
select to only allow fax reception from those facsimiles
that are registered in your address book and those regis-
tered as Permit Fax Numbers, or to reject those recep-
tions from facsimiles registered as Reject Fax Numbers.
1. Select [TX/RX Restriction] using the cursor up/
down keys and press [Change #].
2. Send: Press either [Adr.Book + PermitList] or [No
Restriction].
Receive: Press either [Adr.Book + PermitList],
[Reject List] or [No Restriction].
Turning Fax Forwarding ON/OFF
To use Fax Forwarding, it is necessary to turn it ON in
advance.
1. Select [Fax forwarding] using the cursor up/down
keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Bulletin Board setting
Enter documents into memory once and they will be
available for transmission to any number of receiving par-
ties upon receipt of their polling request.
1. Select [Bulletin Board] using the cursor up/down
2. Press either [Save doc. after Tx] or [Del. doc. after
Tx].
If you select [Del. doc. after Tx], the documents to
be deleted from memory after they are transmitted
once. If you select [Save doc. after Tx], the docu-
ments will remain in memory waiting for the next
polling request even after they are transmitted.
Number of Rings setting
The number of times the fax will [ring] before an incoming
call is answered in the Auto Fax Reception mode, the
Auto FAX/TEL Switching mode [this setting is not avail-
able in metric models] or the TAD Reception mode can
be set here to any number between 1 and 15.
1. Select [# of Rings] using the cursor up/down keys
2. Select the number of rings before an incoming call
is answered in each mode using the [+] or [-] key.
Setting range
Auto Fax Reception mode: 1 to 15
Auto FAX/TEL Switching mode (this setting is not
available in metric models): 0 to 15
TAD Reception mode: 1 to 15
Volume setting
The volume of the alarm, the monitor and the speaker
can be adjusted, or you can make the alarm inaudible.
1. Select [Set Volume (Set the sound volume)] using
the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select the desired alarm volume.
Buzzer Volume: Press either [Large], [Small] or
[Off].
Monitor Volume: Press either [Large], [Medium],
[Small] or [Off].
Speaker Volume: Press either [Large], [Medium],
[Small] or [Off].
Number of Redials setting
Sets the number of times the fax will automatically
attempt to redial a number when the other party's fax line
is busy or some other trouble occurs with the connection.
1. Select [Retry Times] using the cursor up/down keys
2. Select the desired number of redial attempts using
the [+] or [-] key.
Setting range: 0 to 14
3KK
1-3-41
Scan from DP setting
Select whether documents that are set in the Document
Processor will be scanned as 8 1/2 x 11" [A4R] or other
such standard size paper, or as long documents (in the
direction of the paper feed).
1. Select [Doc. P. (Doc. P. scanning)] using the cursor
up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Standard size] or [Long original (Long
orig.)].
NOTE: It is necessary to select [Standard size]
when transmitting both sides of duplex (2-sided)
documents.
If you select [Long original (Long orig.)], it will not
be possible to have documents rotated for trans-
mission.
TX Mode/Default setting
Select which transmission mode, Memory Transmission
or Direct Feed Transmission, will be the default setting in
this fax.
1. Select [TX Mode/Default] using the cursor up/down
2. Press either [Memory TX] or [Dir. Feed Tx].
Receive Mode setting
Select the automatic reception mode.
1. Select [Receive Mode (Reception mode)] using the
cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Fax Reception (Fax Rx)], [Auto Fax/
Tel. SW] or [D.R.D.].
[D.R.D.] will not be displayed in the metric version.
3. When selecting [D.R.D.], select the desired ring
pattern.
RX Date/Time setting
Select whether or not you want information to be printed
out at the top edge of received documents.
1. Select [RX Date/Time] using the cursor up/down
Fax Paper Feeding Tray setting
Select from among the three available modes for feeding
paper to print out all documents that are received when
the fax is in the fax operation mode.
1. Select [Fax pap. feeding tray (Fax paper tray)]
using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change
#].
2. Press either [Auto Select (Auto sel.)], [Fix Size
(Fixed size)] or [Fixed Cassette].
When selecting [Fix Size (Fixed size)], select the
paper size and cassette.
When selecting [Fixed Cassette], select the cas-
sette.
MP Tray setting
Select here whether or not to use the MP tray to feed
paper for printing received faxes.
1. Select [MP tray feeding] using the cursor up/down
2 in 1 RX setting
1. Select [2 in 1 RX] using the cursor up/down keys
Duplex RX setting
When the width of each page received is exactly the
same, the documents will be printed onto the front and
back sides of that size of paper.
1. Select [Duplex RX (2-sided RX)] using the cursor
up/down keys and press [Change #].
Registering the Network FAX Reception Settings
Turn this setting ON in order to perform Network FAX
Reception.
1. Select [Network FAX reception] using the cursor up/
3. When selecting [On], select whether to print out the
documents received with this machine or not by
pressing either [On] or [Off].
Adding Information to the NW-FAX File Name
Set the order of the information that will be added to the
NW-FAX file name which is created for NW-FAX Trans-
mission/Reception.
1. Select [NW-FAX File Add.Info.] using the cursor up/
2. Press either [Date/Time + Fax #] or [Fax # + Date/
Time].
Turning the Save Transmitted Documents Function
ON/OFF
Select whether to save the transmitted documents on the
server computer (the computer on which the provided
Scanner File Utility is installed) or not.
1. Select [Save Tx. original] using the cursor up/down
Selecting the File Type
Select the file type in which the documents for transmis-
sion, or of received documents, will be saved in the
server computer (the computer on which the provided
Scanner File Utility is installed).
1. Select [File Format (File type)] using the cursor up/
2. Press either [PDF] or [TIFF].
Remote Diagnosis setting
Set to take advantage of our remote diagnosis system.
1. Select [Remote Diag. (Remote diagn.)] using the
cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
Reception Size setting
Set whether receive faxes at the same size or a reduced
size.
1. Select [Reception size] using the cursor up/down
2. Press either [Reduce Priority] or [Manual Priority].
3KK
1-3-42
(3) Registration
Registering New One-Touch Keys
Register destination fax (telephone) numbers and names
under one-touch keys.
1. Press [Dial].
2. Press an unregistered speed-dial key on the touch
panel.
3. Press [One-touch key].
4. Enter the fax number to register under that one-
touch key using the numeric keys. (Maximum 32
digits)
5. Press [Next].
6. Enter the name of the other party. (Maximum 20
characters)
7. Check the registered information.
8. To perform more detailed settings like selecting the
transmission speed, or designating this one-touch
key for F-Code Based Communication or
Encrypted Transmission, press [Setting].
9. Select the desired transmission speed from among
those available: 33600bps, 14400bps and
9600bps.
10. To designate this key for F-Code Based Communi-
cation, press [Subaddress Tx].
To designate this key for Encrypted Transmission,
go directly to step 13.
To register this one-touch key with the entered
information as is, press [Close] and proceed
directly to step 15.
11. To use this key for F-Code Based Communication,
press [On].
Enter the desired subaddress and F-Code pass-
word using the numeric keys. (Maximum 20 digits)
12. Press [Close] twice and then go directly to step 15.
13. To designate this key for Encrypted Transmission,
press [Encryption TX (Encryption)].
To use this key for Encrypted Transmission, press
[On].
Enter the 2-digit key code (01 - 20) using the
numeric keys.
Press [Encryption box #] and then enter the number
of thedestination party's Encryption Box using the
numeric keys.
14. Press [Close] twice.
15. Press [OK].
Registering New Chain Dial Keys
Register chain numbers and names under one-touch
keys.
1. Press [Dial].
panel.
3. Press [Chain].
4. Enter the desired chain dial number using the
numeric keys. (Maximum 32 digits)
5. Press [Next].
6. Enter the desired name for the chain dial key. (Max-
imum 20 characters)
8. Press [OK].
Registering New Group Dial Keys
Register multiple destination fax (telephone) numbers
and names under a one-touch key for group dialing.
1. Press [Dial].
panel.
3. Press [Group].
4. Enter the other party's fax numbers.
5. Press [Finish dest. Set (Dest. set)].
6. Enter the desired group name and press [Next].
(Maximum 20 characters)
7. Check the currently registered information.
8. Press [OK].
Program Keys
Register frequently used communication modes or fax
numbers under one-touch keys.
1. Press [Dial].
panel.
3. Press [Program].
4. To designate a time of day for the operation to
begin, press [Off] under [Delayed TX] and go
directly to step 6.
5. Enter the desired time of day for the operation to
begin using the numeric keys.
6. Press [Send] or [RX Polling] to choose the type of
transmission.
7. Press [Next].
8. Enter the destination fax number.
10. Enter a name for the program and press [Next].
(Maximum 20 characters)
11. Check the currently registered information.
12. Press [OK].
Registering the Information Identifying Your Facsim-
ile (Location Info. setting)
Register information identifying your station (fax number,
station name and station ID).
1. Press [Location Info.].
2. To register your fax number: Press [ ] key and go
to step 3.
To register your station name: Press [Own Name]
and go directly to step 4.
To register your station ID: Press [Own ID] and pro-
ceed directly to step 5.
3. Enter your fax number using the numeric keys.
The fax number can be up to 20 digits in length.
Press [OK].
4. Enter the desired name for your station.
The station name can be up to 32 characters Press
[End].
5. Enter the desired station ID (4 digits) using the
numeric keys.
6. Press [Confirm].
3KK
1-3-43
Setting the Current Date and Time
Set the date and the time that will appear in the message
display.
1. Press [Date & Time].
2. Enter the present date, in order of the month, day
and year (day, month and year) using the numeric
keys.
3. Press [Time] and then enter the present time using
the numeric keys.
The time should be entered on a 24-hour basis
(00:00 - 23:29).
4. Press [Confirm].
Registering New F-Code Confidential Boxes
Register subaddress confidential boxes for subaddress-
based confidential communication. Up to 100 boxes can
be registered.
1. Press [Box].
2. Press [Subaddress confi. box (Subaddr. confid.
box)].
3. Press an unregistered key.
4. Enter the subaddress 4-digit using the numeric
keys.
5. Press [Password] and enter the 4-digit F-Code
password.
6. To use the NW-FAX Reception function, press
either [On] or [Off].
7. Press [Confirm].
8. Press [Close].
Registering New F-Code Relay Boxes
Register subaddress relay box for subaddress-based
relay broadcast communication. Up to 15 boxes can be
registered.
1. Press [Box].
2. Press [Subaddress relay box].
4. Enter the subaddress 4-digit using the numeric
keys.
5. Press [Password] and enter the 4-digit F-Code
password.
6. Press [Next].
7. Enter the fax number of a final destination. (Max.
300 destinations)
If you entered the fax number with the numeric
keys, press [Next destinat. (Next dest.)].
9. Select whether or not you want the received docu-
ments to be printed out at your fax : Press either
[On] or [Off].
Select whether or not to send a Transmission
Report regarding the results of the final transmis-
sions to the initial transmitting station: Press either
[On] or [Off].
10. Press [Next].
When selecting [Off] under [Return report], proceed
directly to step 13.
11. Enter the fax number of the initial transmitting sta-
tion using the numeric keys, one-touch keys and
Chain dial keys.
14. Press [Close].
Registering New Encryption Boxes
Register encryption boxes for receiving encrypted trans-
missions. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.
1. Press [Box].
2. Press [Encryption box].
4. Enter the 4-digit number using the numeric keys.
5. Press [Box. ID] and enter the 4-digit number.
6. Press [Encryption Code (Encr. code)] and enter the
2-digit Key Code (01 - 20) using the numeric keys.
7. Select whether or not you want documents
received into this Encryption Box to be automati-
cally printed out.
Press either [On] or [Off] under [Print on RX.].
To use the NW-FAX Reception function, press [On].
8. Press [Confirm].
9. Press [Close].
Registering New Permit Fax Numbers
Register the password (permit fax number) for password
check communication.
1. Press [TX/RX Restrict.].
2. Press [Permit Fax No.].
4. Enter the desired Permit Fax Number using the
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Close].
Registering New Permit Ids
Register the password (permit IDs) for password check
communication.
2. Press [Permit ID No.].
4. Enter the desired 4-digit Permit ID using the
numeric keys.
5. Press [Confirm].
6. Press [Close].
Registering New Reject Fax Numbers
Register up to 5 numbers as Reject Fax Numbers.
2. Press [Reject FAX No.].
4. Enter the desired Reject Fax Number using the
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Close].
3KK
1-3-44
Registering the Fax Forwarding Information
Register the destination and designated hours for fax for-
warding.
1. Press [Fax Forwarding].
2. Enter the fax number of the destination fax number
using the numeric keys, abbreviated numbers, one-
touch keys or chain dial keys.
4. Select whether or not you want the received docu-
ments to be printed out at your fax.
Press either [On] or [Off] under [Print Here].
5. Select whether or not you want to designate a time
for the Fax Forwarding operation to begin and end.
Press either [Delayed TX] or [All Day] under [Fax
For'd].
6. When selecting [Delayed TX], enter the desired
time for Fax Forwarding to begin using the numeric
keys.
7. Press [Shut-off Time] and enter the desired time for
Fax Forwarding to end using the numeric keys.
8. Press [Next].
9. Check that information.
10. Press [OK].
Changing the Remote Switching Number
Change the remote switching number, which is set to 55
at the factory, for receiving faxes using the telephone
connected to the machine.
1. Press [Remote SW dial].
2. Enter the new Remote Switching Number using the
numeric keys (2 digits).
3. Press [Confirm].
Registering the Remote Test ID
Register the designated remote test ID for remote diag-
nosis.
1. Press [Remote Test ID].
2. Enter the designated 4-digit Remote Test ID using
the numeric keys.
3. Press [Confirm].
Registering New Encryption Keys
Register a 16-digit cipher key password for encrypted
communication.
1. Press [Encryption key].
If Restricted Access is turned OFF, go to the next
step. If Restricted Access is turned ON, proceed
directly to step 3.
2. Enter the currently registered administrator number
using the numeric keys.
4. Create the desired 16-character Encryption Key
using the numerals (0 - 9) and the English alphabet
(A - Z) on the touch panel.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Close].
Registering the Network FAX Information
File name (Transmission/Reception): For registering the
default file name when documents which have been
transmitted or received using the Network FAX functions
are saved in the designated folder.
1. Press [Network FAX].
2. Press [File name].
3. To register the file name for received faxes, press
[NetworkFAX Rx. (NW-FAX RX)].
To register the file name for transmitted faxes,
press [Save Tx. original].
4. Enter the desired name using the English alphabet,
numerals or other available symbols. (Maximum 13
digits)
5. Press [Close].
IP address / Host name: For registering the IP address or
host name of the server computer in which documents
which have been sent or received using the Network FAX
functions are saved. In this case, the Scanner File Utility
needs to be installed.
2. Press [IP addr./Host name].
3. Enter the IP address (numerals) or the host name
using the English alphabet or numerals. (Maximum
32 digits)
4. Press [Close].
Administrator's e-mail address: For registering the e-mail
address of the computer to be notified in case of an error,
as well as where to send Transmission and Reception
Reports. Also registers the account name and password
for SMTP authorization in order to increase security in e-
mail transmission.
2. Press [Admin. E-mail ad.].
3. Press [Admin. E-mail ad.].
4. Enter the administrator's e-mail address using the
English alphabet, numerals or other available sym-
bols. (Maximum 64 digits)
5. Press [End].
6. Press [Account].
7. Enter the account name using the English alphabet,
digits)
8. Press [End].
9. Press [Password].
10. Enter the currently registered administrator number
using the numeric keys.
11. Enter the password using the English alphabet,
digits)
12. Press [End].
13. Press [Close].
3KK
1-3-45
Save Folder Number: For registering the number of the
folder in which documents which have been transmitted
or received using the Network FAX functions will be
saved.
2. Press [Saving Folder No. (No.of save folder)].
3. Enter the save folder number using the numeric
keys.
4. Press [Save Tx. original] and enter the save folder
number using the numeric keys.
5. Press [Enter].
6. Press [Close].
3KK
1-3-46
3KK
1-4-1
1-4 Error Codes
1-4-1 Error codes
(1) Error code
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U
followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indication, followed by five digits.)
The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate the
detailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits.
Error code
U X X X X X
Detailed classification of error code
General classification of error code
Error code indication
3KK
1-4-2
(2) Table of general classification
Error code Description
U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to page 1-4-
4 U004XX error code table).
U00500 Multiple communication was interrupted and call was not made on destination units after interrup-
tion.
U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to page 1-4-5 U006XX error
code table).
U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.
U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 U008XX error code table).
U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 U009XX error code table).
U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-6 U010XX error code
table).
U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-8 U011XX error code
table).
U01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U017XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34 mode
(refer to page 1-4-10 U017XX error code table).
U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34 mode (refer
to page 1-4-10 U018XX error code table).
U02000 Relay broadcast was refused by a relay station because of a mismatch in permit ID number and
permit telephone number when a relay command was issued.
U02100 A relay command failed because the destination unit (relay station) had no relay broadcast capa-
bility.
U02200 A relay command from a command station failed because a telephone number that was not regis-
tered in the relay station was specified. Or, relay broadcast was requested to a relay station but
failed because a telephone number that was not registered in the relay station was specified. Or,
Subaddress-based relay broadcast transmission failed because the data registered in the Subad-
dress relay box was deleted.
U023XX Receiving station information was not normally received in reception of a relay command (refer to
page 1-4-10 U023XX error code table).
U02400 An interoffice subaddress-based relay transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in the
specified relay box number.
U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03100 In reverse polling, although no original was set in the destination unit, transmission was complete.
U03200 In confidential polling reception, data was not accumulated in the specified box in the destination
unit. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box
specified by the destination unit.
U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit
ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, operation
was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.
3KK
1-4-3
U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is
either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500 In confidential polling reception, the specified confidential box No. was not registered in the desti-
nation. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, the specified Subaddress con-
fidential box number was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being
accessed.
U03600 Confidential polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in specified confidential box
No. Or, an interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a
mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number.
U03700 Confidential polling reception failed because the destination unit had no confidential polling trans-
mission capability or data was not accumulated in any box in the destination unit. Or, interoffice
subaddress-based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-
based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any subaddress confidential
box in the destination unit.
U04000 The confidential box specified for confidential transmission was not registered in the destination
unit. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box num-
ber was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being accessed.
U04100 Confidential transmission failed because the destination unit had no confidential capability. Or,
subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-based
reception capability.
U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication
capability.
U044XX Communication was interrupted because of an encryption key error during encrypted transmission
(refer to page 1-4-10 U044XX error code table).
U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05000 In transmission with a specified number, the set number of originals was different from the number
of transmitted originals.
U05100 Password check transmission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the permit IDs
did not agree with.
U05200 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit IDs did not match,
the rejected FAX numbers did match, or the destination receiver did not return its phone number.
U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted
numbers did not match, the rejected numbers did match, or the machine in question did not
acknowledge its phone number.
U09000 G3 communication was attempted but failed because the destination unit was a G2 machine.
U12000 Relay broadcast was requested from a command station but memory overflowed during reception.
Or, in subaddress-based relay reception, memory overflowed.
U12100 Relay was commanded but memory overflowed in the destination unit (relay station).
U14000 Memory overflowed during confidential reception. Or, in subaddress-based confidential reception,
memory overflowed.
U14100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during confidential transmission. Or, in interoffice sub-
address-based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.
U19200 Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred.
U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.
U19400 Reception failed because an error occurred during JBIG decoding.
3KK
1-4-4
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B
U00420 A relay request was received from the host center but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit
ID or telephone number.
U00421 Subaddress-based relay reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subad-
dress relay box number.
U00430 Polling request (confidential or reverse) was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in
permit number. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but inter-
rupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431 Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was
not registered. Or, an subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the
specified subaddress confidential box was not registered.
U00432 Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in confidential box ID
number. Or, an subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mis-
match in Subaddress confidential box numbers.
U00433 Confidential polling request was received but data was not present in the confidential box. Or, sub-
address-based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the
subaddress confidential box.
U00434 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box
No. was intended for encryption.
U00435 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box
was being accessed. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but
interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was being accessed.
U00440 Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was not regis-
tered. Or, subaddress-based confidential reception or subaddress-based relay reception was
interrupted because the specified subaddress box was not registered. Or, subaddress based con-
fidential reception or subaddress relay command reception was interrupted because the specified
subaddress box No. was being accessed.
U00441 Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was intended for
encryption.
U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit IDs did not agree with while the des-
tination transmitter is in password-check transmission or restricted transmission.
U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not regis-
tered. Or, encrypted reception request was received but interrupted because the specified encryp-
tion box was being accessed.
U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box
was not registered.
3KK
1-4-5
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error
U00600 The document processor cover is open.
U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00602 Image scanning section problem.
U00603 No document feed.
U00604 Document length exceeded the limit of the bitmap memory capacity.
U00610 Recording section cover is open.
U00611 Recording paper JAM
U00613 Image writing section problem
U00614 Nearly empty of recording paper
U00615 Empty of recording paper
U00620 Copier fixing unit problem
U00622 Copier drive motor problem
U00655 CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error.
U00656 Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error.
U00670 Power was cut off during communication.
U00677 There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode.
U00690 System error.
U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.
U00810 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
3KK
1-4-6
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission
U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at
2400 bps.
U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.
U01010 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01011 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal, and the preset number
of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01012 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01013 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01014 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded.
U01015 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and the preset number of
U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal,
and T1 timeout was detected.
U01017 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal, and the preset number of
U01018 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number of
U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset number of com-
mand retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset number of com-
mand retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01023 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.NULL signal, and the preset number
of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01024 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.MPS signal, and the preset number of
U01025 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal, and the preset number
of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01026 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal, and the preset number of
U01027 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01040 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during standby for DIS signal reception.
U01041 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal (between units of
our make).
U01042 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal.
3KK
1-4-7
U01043 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal (between units of
our make).
U01044 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal (between units of our
make).
U01045 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal.
U01046 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal.
U01047 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal.
U01048 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal.
U01049 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal (between units of our make).
U01050 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal (ECM).
U01051 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal (ECM).
U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).
U01053 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal (ECM).
U01054 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.MPS signal (ECM).
U01055 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal (ECM).
U01056 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal (ECM).
U01057 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal (ECM).
U01070 Polarity reversal was detected during handshake.
U01071 Polarity reversal was detected during message transmission.
U01072 A break in loop current was detected during transmission.
U01073 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the receiver unit, a CM signal was not detected when trans-
mitting after reception.
U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.
U01091 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because a PPR signal was
received over 10 times even after reducing the communication speed to the minimum with the
symbol speed maintained at the level of connection.
U01092 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impossible com-
bination of the symbol speed and communication speed.
3KK
1-4-8
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception
U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.
U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS sig-
nal.
U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.
U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal.
U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.
U01112 No training reception after reception of a DCS or NSS signal.
U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01114 No message reception after transmission of a CFR signal.
U01115 No message reception after transmission of an MCF signal.
U01116 No message reception after transmission of a PPR signal.
U01117 No message reception after transmission of a CTR signal.
U01118 No message reception after transmission of an ERR signal.
U01119 No further signals were received after reception of a message.
U01120 No response after transmission of an MCF signal.
U01121 No response after transmission of an RTP signal.
U01122 No response after transmission of an RTN signal.
U01123 No response after transmission of a PIP signal.
U01124 No response after transmission of a PIN signal.
U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).
U01126 No response after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).
U01127 No response after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).
U01128 No response after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).
U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01140 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DIS signal.
U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.
U01142 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS or NSS signal.
U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01144 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CFR signal.
U01145 A DCN signal was received after reception of a message.
U01146 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an MCF signal (interoffice communication after
reception of an MPS, EOM signal or confidential interoffice communication).
U01147 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTP signal.
U01148 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTN signal.
U01149 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIP signal.
U01150 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIN signal.
U01151 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).
U01152 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTR signal (ECM).
U01153 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).
3KK
1-4-9
U01154 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).
U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01160 During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line.
U01161 Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception.
U01162 A break in loop current was detected during message reception.
U01163 Polarity reversal was detected during message reception.
U01164 One page length exceeded the specified length during message reception.
U01170 A decoding error occurred during MMR message reception.
U01172 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the transmitting unit, a JM signal was not detected after
transmission of a CM signal when receiving after transmission.
U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception
sequence in the V.34 mode.
U01199 A DIS signal with different FIF was received after transmission of a DIS signal.
3KK
1-4-10
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission
U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before enter-
ing phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar, for polling transmission)/
INFOh was not detected.
U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel before
entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of
communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN signal was received from the destination
unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and, in response to the sig-
nal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal, and the line was cut.
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception
U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering
phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar, for polling reception)/probing
tone was not detected.
U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.
U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before
entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of
communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal was transmitted to the destination
unit and the line was cut.
(2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception
(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission
U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
U01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01821 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
U02303 Timeout was detected before a correct DNL signal was received.
U02304 A signal other than MPS or EOM signal was received after a DNL signal was received.
U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04401 Calling failed during encrypted transmission because the encryption key was not registered.
3KK
1-5-1
1-5 Troubleshooting
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning front cover/feed cover switch off and back
on.
Code Contents
Remarks
C0030 Fax control PWB system problem
Processing with the fax software was
disabled due to a hardware or software
problem.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the
operation.
C0070 Abnormal detection of fax control
PWB incompatibility
In the initial communication with the fax
control PWB, any normal communication
command is not transmitted.
Defective fax soft-
ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
C0280 Communication problem between the
fax control PWB and main PWB
After main PWB status change signal
turns on 1 minute, when it does not
receive key required command from the
fax control PWB, one time it resets the
FAX.After that, while main PWB status
change signal turns on furthermore 1
minute, when it does not receive key
required command from the fax control
PWB.
When FAX_READY signal continues
fake for 6 s, one time it resets the FAX.
After that, when FAX_READY fake con-
tinues fake for 6 s.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
the main PWB and the connector on the fax
control PWB, connection of connector YC1
on the fax control PWB and the connector
on the fax relay PWB. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB
C0820 Fax control PWB CG ROM checksum
error
A checksum error occurred with the CG
ROM data of the fax control PWB.
Defective fax soft-
ware.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
C0830 Fax control PWB flash program area
checksum error
A checksum error occurred with the pro-
gram of the fax control PWB.
Defective fax soft-
ware.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
C0860 Fax control PWB software switch
checksum error
A checksum error occurred with the soft-
ware switch value of the fax control
PWB.
Defective fax soft-
ware.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
C0870 Fax control PWB to main PWB high
capacity data transfer problem
High-capacity data transfer between the
fax control PWB and the scanner MIP
PWB was not normally performed even if
the data transfer was retried 10 times.
Poor contact in the
connector termi-
nals.
the main PWB and the connector on the fax
control PWB. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB
3KK
1-5-2
C0880 Program archive problem
When power is turned on, the com-
pressed program in the Flash ROM on
the fax control PWB was not success-
fully decompressed.
Defective fax soft-
ware.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
C0890 Fax control PWB CG FONT archive
problem
When power is turned on, the com-
pressed CG font in the Flash ROM on
the fax control PWB was not success-
fully decompressed.
Defective fax soft-
ware.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
C0920 Fax file system error
The backup data is not retained for file
system abnormality of flash memory of
the fax control PWB.
Defective fax con-
trol PWB.
operation.
Code Contents
Remarks
3KK
1-5-3
1-5-2 Troubleshooting
Contents
Remarks
An error message is displayed on the computer
screen while transmission is performed.
Network error has occurred.
A connection error
of network scan-
ner PWB occurred
while data was
transmitted.
Connect the network scanner PWB properly.
Communication time out has occurred. A network cable
was disconnected
while data was
transmitted.
Connect the network cables of the computer
and the machine properly.
FAX connection has been cut. Transmission
failed because
data amount (traf-
fic) on the network
was too large.
Retransmit after a while. Contact the net-
work administrator for check.
FAX connection could not be made for the following
possible reasons:
The FAX main unit isn't turned on.
Network FAX address is wrong.
A fault has occurred at the FAX machine.
The fax system is
not installed.
Install the fax system.
Self diagnostic
code C0280
occurred.
Check the connection of the flat cable.
NIC is being initial-
ized.
Retransmit after a while.
Self diagnostic
code of NIC
occurred.
RTC memory is not mounted or connection
is not proper. Check the connection.
A network cable is
disconnected.
Connect the network cables properly.
The main power
switch is OFF.
Turn ON the main power switch.
The IP address or
host name is not
correct.
Check the IP address and host name regis-
tered in the FAX Driver and those registered
in the network scanner PWB.
The FAX is in use. Copying is being
performed.
Fax printing is
being performed.
Fax setting is being
performed.
Received originals
are being transmit-
ted.
Remote diagnosis
is being performed.
Network scanner is
being used.
Maintenance mode
is being performed.
Retransmit after the cause described left is
cleared.
FAX memory is full. Fax memory
became full while
transmission was
performed.
Secure memory area. (Delete data in the
memory.)
Add memory.
Retransmit with smaller resolution.
Divide originals to be transmitted.
3KK
1-5-4
The number of FAX transmission reservations has
reached maximum.
NW-FAX transmis-
sion was tried
when 50 items of
fax transmission
was reserved.
After a while (after the number of the
reserved items is reduced), retransmit.
The FAX cannot be used. The main power
switch is OFF
when reception
into memory is set.
Turn on the main power switch.
Fax is being reset. Retransmit after clearing reset.
The job has been interrupted at the FAX operation
panel.
The interrupt key
was pressed while
transmission was
performed.
Retransmit after interrupt was cleared.
Mail notification related
Transmission report is not delivered to clients.
NW-FAX transmis-
sion of report out-
put in the fax initial
setting is OFF or to
be performed in a
special condition.
If the setting is OFF, no report is returned
regardless of fax communication result. If a
special condition is set, a report is returned
when a special event such as fax communi-
cation error or broadcast transmission
occurs. If a transmission report is needed,
turn the setting ON.
A client mail
address is not reg-
istered in the FAX
Driver.
Register the client mail address in the FAX
Driver initial setting.
A client mail
address registered
in the FAX Driver is
not correct.
Check the client mail address.
The mail address
of the fax adminis-
trator or the scan-
ner administrator is
not registered.
Register the mail address of the fax adminis-
trator or the scanner administrator.
The IP address of
mail server is not
registered in the
scanner initial set-
ting.
Register the IP address and host name of
mail server.
The IP address or
host name of mail
server registered in
the scanner initial
setting is not cor-
rect.
Check the registered IP address and host
name of mail server.
Accounting of a cli-
ent mail address is
not performed.
Contact the administrator for check.
The mail server is
down.
Check the mail server.
The client mail soft-
ware has not
started.
Start the mail software.
Contents
Remarks
3KK
1-5-5
Activity report, restricted access report, power fail-
ure report or backup RAM error report is not deliv-
ered to the administrator.
NW-FAX reception
is OFF in the fax
initial setting.
Turn the NW-FAX reception setting ON.
Scanner adminis-
trator mail address
or fax administrator
mail address is not
registered.
Register the scanner administrator mail
address or the fax administrator mail
address.
Scanner adminis-
trator mail address
or fax administrator
mail address is not
correct.
Check the administrator mail address.
The IP address or
host name of mail
server is not regis-
tered in the scan-
ner initial setting.
Register the IP address and host name of
mail server.
The IP address or
host name regis-
tered in the scan-
ner initial setting is
not correct.
Check the registered IP address and host
name of mail server.
Accounting of an
administrator mail
address is not per-
formed in the mail
server.
The mail server is
down.
Check the mail server.
The administrator
mail software has
not started.
Start the mail software.
Contents
Remarks
3KK
1-5-6
Received originals are not stored. (including recep-
tion report)
NW-FAX reception
setting is OFF.
Turn NW-FAX reception in the fax initial set-
ting ON.
The IP address or
host name of stor-
age destination
computer is not
correct.
Check the IP address and host name regis-
tered in the fax and those in the storage des-
tination computer.
The storage desti-
nation computer
has not started.
Start the storage destination computer and
start the Scanner File Utility.
Transmission
failed because
data amount (traf-
fic) on the network
was too large.
Contact the network administrator for check.
Copying is being
performed.
Fax printing is
being performed.
Fax setting is being
performed.
Received originals
are being transmit-
ted.
Network scanner is
being used.
Perform automatic retransmission after the
cause described left is cleared.
The Scanner File
Utility of the stor-
age destination
computer has not
started.
Start the storage destination computer and
start the Scanner File Utility.
The network cable
is disconnected.
Connect the network cable properly.
The reception
folder number is
not correct.
Use the reception folder number registered
in fax the same as the folder number set in
the Scanner File Utility.
The hard disk drive
in the storage des-
tination computer
is full.
The Scanner File
Utility version does
not match.
Upgrade the Scanner File Utility to Ver. 3.X
or later.
The reception
report of report out-
put in the fax initial
setting is OFF or to
be performed in a
special condition.
If the setting is OFF, no report is transmitted
regardless of fax communication result. If a
special condition is set, a report is transmit-
ted when a special event such as fax com-
munication error occurs. If a reception report
is needed, turn the setting ON.
Contents
Remarks
3KK
1-5-7
Address book related
When a CSV file is imported, leading 0 of fax num-
bers is deleted.
If a CSV file is
edited with Excel,
since fax numbers
are processed as
numerical values,
leading 0 is auto-
matically deleted.
Edit the CSV file with a text editor.
When a CSV file is imported, the first line is not
imported.
The first line of
CSV files is pro-
cessed as header.
Input item names to indicate the description
of each column in the first line of CSV files.
List items are not displayed. The display width
is changed by
dragging column
header in the list. If
the display width is
0, the item is not
displayed.
Select the position between the column
header items and drag so that the item is
displayed.
When an address is deleted, the group is deleted. If all addresses of a
group are deleted,
the group is also
deleted.
Resister the group again.
The address book cannot be started. If the address book
finishes abnormally
because of any
reason, the
address book infor-
mation may
remain.
Restart the computer and start the address
book.
The toolbar is not displayed. If Toolbar in the
View menu is Off,
the toolbar is not
displayed.
Turn the Toolbar setting of the View menu
On.
Although the Toolbar setting in the View menu is
On, the toolbar is not displayed.
The toolbar can be
docked and placed
outside the
address book.
Check to see if the toolbar is placed outside
the address book.
After scrolling downward, if the cursor is moved
upward by one or two, a different destination from
the destination decided on the screen is selected.
Fax software ver-
sion is earlier.
Upgrade the software.
Contents
Remarks
3KK
1-5-8
3KK
2-1-1
Figure 2-1-1
1. Fax control PWB (FCPWB).......................... Modulates, demodulates, compresses, decompresses and smoothes out
image data, and converts resolution of image data.
2. NCU PWB (NCUPWB)................................. Controls connection to the telephone line.
3. Backup battery (BUBAT) .............................. Saves stored image when a power-down occur.
4. Speaker (SP)................................................ Outputs buzzer, monitoring and speaker sounds.
5. Memory module DIMM................................. Expands memory capacity for image data and bitmap conversion.
(option)
6. Fax relay PWB (FRYPWB) .......................... Consists of wiring relay circuits using electrical components.
1
2
3 4
5
6
3KK
2-1-2
3KK
2-2-1
2-2-1 Fax control PWB
Figure 2-2-1 Fax control PWB block diagram
ASIC
U061
SDRAM
4M x 16bit x 2
(upper/lower)
Optional
memory
Maximum
64 MB
SSCG
LVC
LVC
LVC
Oscillator
(44MHz)
Backup
circuit
RTC
power
supply
1.9V
Flash memories
1M x 16bit x 2
(upper/lower)
Modem LSI
U074
Analog
circuit
Backup
circuit
NCU
PWB
Engine IF
(1/2)
Fax control PWB
LVC
CPU
U011
(133MHz)
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
1.9V
Data bus
Address bus
5V
5V
5V 5V
5V
5V
1.9V
SGND,PGND
24V
5V
12V
12V
12V
5V
12V
24V
12 V
regulator
3.3 V
regulator
1.9 V
regulator
3.3V
3.3V
44MHz
44MHz
44MHz
32bit
32bit
32bit
/FAXSLEEP/WAKEUP
8bit
3.3V
2.4V
Speaker
circuit
Speaker
LVC
U021
U051
U052
U022
Backup
battery
(NiMH)
Lithium battery
backup circuit
Lithium
battery
RTL
Oscillator
Connect
to the fax
relay PWB
Connect
to the fax
relay PWB
Engine IF
(2/2)
3KK
2-2-2
Figure 2-2-2 Fax control PWB silk-screen diagram
YC10
Y
C
1
1
Y
C
3
Y
C
4
Y
C
6
Y
C
1
Y
C
8
51
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
4
3
9
49
50
52
1
34
A
2
0
B
2
0
B
1
9
A
1
9
A
2
A
1
B
2
B
1
12
4
2
3
YC7
Y
C
9
59
57
58
60
4
1
4
0
3
Y
C
2
Y
C
5
2
1
2
2
12
1
3
3KK
2-2-3
YC1 A1 _WAKEUPFAX O 3.3/0 V DC _WAKEUPFAX signal
Connected
to the fax
relay PWB.
A2 _FAXSET I 3.3/0 V DC _FAXSET signal
A3 MAIN_RXD O 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)
MAIN_RXD signal
A4 _FAXREADY O 3.3/0 V DC _FAXREADY signal
A5 _SREQ O 3.3/0 V DC _SREQ signal
A6 _FPVD O 3.3/0 V DC _FPVD signal
A7 FVCLK O 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)
FVCLK signal
A8 _FVSYNC O 3.3/0 V DC _FVSYNC signal
A9 FMRE O 3.3/0 V DC FMRE signal
A10 _FPHSYNC - - Not used
A11 FPVCLK - - Not used
A12 FAXSLEEP I 3.3/0 V DC FAXSLEEP signal
A13 _MAINSTS I 3.3/0 V DC _MAINSTS signal
A14 _MMISTS I 3.3/0 V DC _MMISTS signal
A15 MAIN_TXD I 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)
MAIN_TXD signal
A16 FMIPOUT I 3.3/0 V DC FMIPOUT signal
A17 FOVSYNC I 3.3/0 V DC FOVSYNC signal
A18 _FOHSTHIN I 3.3/0 V DC _FOHSTHIN signal
A19 FMREOUT I 3.3/0 V DC FMREOUT signal
A20 FFOCLK I 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)
FFOCLK signal
B1 PGND - - Ground
B2 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
B3 GND - - Ground
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 _SETFAX O 3.3/0 V DC _SETFAX signal
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 PFVSYNC - - Not used
B10 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
B14 GND - - Ground
B16 GND - - Ground
B18 GND - - Ground
B20 GND - - Ground
3KK
2-2-4
YC2 1 +12V O 12 V DC +12 V DC power supply
Connected
to the NCU
PWB.
2 A.G - - Ground
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
4 S.G - - Ground
5 EXTRING1 - - Not used
6 EXTRING2 - - Not used
7 KMUTE O 3.3/0 V DC KMUTE signal
8 SHUNT O 3.3/0 V DC SHUNT signal
9 PLSDIL O 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)
Dial pulse signal
10 EARTH O 3.3/0 V DC EARTH signal
11 TELSEL O 3.3/0 V DC TELSEL signal
12 FAXSEL O 3.3/0 V DC FAXSEL signal
13 NCUTYPE2 - Ground*1/
Open*2
Destination identification signal 2
14 NCUTYPE3 - Open*1/
Ground*2
15 _OFFHOOK I 3.3/0 V DC _OFFHOOK signal
16 NCUTYPE1 - Open Destination identification signal 1
17 _ONHOOK1 I 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK1 signal
18 _ONHOOK2 I 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK2 signal
19 _RNGDET I 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)
Ring signal
20 MODTXD O Analog MODTXD signal
21 RXIN I Analog RXIN signal
22 MODRXD I Analog MODRXD signal
YC3 1 BEEP O Analog Speaker sound output
Connected
to the
speaker.
2 AGND - - Ground
YC4 1 +2.4V-NIMH I 2.4 V DC Backup 2.4 V DC power supply input
Connected
to the
backup bat-
tery.
2 GND - - Ground
3KK
2-2-5
2-2-2 NCU PWB
Figure 2-2-3 NCU PWB block diagram
Figure 2-2-4NCU PWB silk-screen diagram
Destination
identification circuit
(JP20,21,22)
NCUTYPE
1, 2, 3
K70
K11
K10
_ONHOOK2
_ONHOOK1
RXIN
FAXSEL
MODRXD
MODTXD
SHUNT
PLSDIL
_RNGDET
EARTH
DCCONT
_OFFHOOK
EXTRING1
EXTRING2
TELSEL
LINE1
LINE2
EXTEL1
EXTEL2
TEL L1
TEL L2
N.C.
N.C.
Loop current
detection/tone signal
reception circuit
(PC30,PC31)
Accounting
pulse
elimination
circuit (T60)
External telephone
off-hook detection circuit
(TR50,TR51,TR52)
Ring signal
detection
circuit
(PC60)
DC loop/dial pulse
transmission circuit
(PC80)
Line
transformer
(T70)
Polarity switching
detection circuit
(PC32,PC33)
MCN1 MCN2
4
3
4
3
CN1
1
2
21
22
3KK
2-2-6
YC1 1 RXIN O Analog RXIN signal
Connected
to the fax
control
PWB.
2 MODRXD O Analog MODRXD signal
3 _RNGDET O 3.3/0 V DC Ring signal
4 MODTXD I Analog MODTXD signal
5 _ONHOOK1 O 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK1 signal
6 _ONHOOK2 O 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK2 signal
7 _OFFHOOK O 3.3/0 V DC _OFFHOOK signal
8 NCUTYPE1 - Open Destination identification signal 1
9 NCUTYPE2 - Ground*1/
Open*2
10 NCUTYPE3 - Open*1/
Ground*2
11 TELSEL I 3.3/0 V DC TELSEL signal
12 FAXSEL I 3.3/0 V DC FAXSEL signal
13 PLSDIL I 3.3/0 V DC Dial pulse signal
14 EARTH I 3.3/0 V DC EARTH signal
15 DCCONT I 3.3/0 V DC DCCONT signal
16 SHUNT I 3.3/0 V DC SHUNT signal
17 N.C - - Not used
18 N.C - - Not used
20 GND - - Ground
21 12V I 12 V DC +12 V DC supply
22 GND - - Ground

Service DP710

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Service DP710

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

SERVICE

1. Fax control assembly

Anda mungkin juga menyukai